Operator Manual PDF

You might also like

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 290

GE Medical Systems

Technical
Publications

Direction 46-030370
Revision 3
P9893KM

RT 3200 Advantage - I
Operator Manual

Copyright© 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996 by General Electric Company

Operating Documentation
GE Medical Systems

GE Medical Systems: Telex: 3797371


P.O. Box 414, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201 U.S.A.
(Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North America)

GE Medical Systems—Europe:
283 rue de la Miniére BP34
78533 BUC Cedex
REVISION HISTORY
REV DATE REASON FOR CHANGE

0 August 5, 1993 Initial Release


1 June 15, 1994 Version 5 Software
2 October 9, 1995 MZ Probe Addition
3 July 12, 1996 CK Probe Addition

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION


NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER

Title Page 3 3-7 thru 3-14 0 6-55 thru 6-62 0


A and B 3 3-15 and 3-16 1 7-1 thru 7-12 3
i thru viii 3 4-1 thru 4-10 0 7-13 thru 7-36 0
ix thru xiv 1 5-1 thru 5-24 0 8-1 thru 8-16 2
Report on Publication 0 5-25 and 5-26 3 9-1 and 9-2 0
1-1 and 1-2 0 5-27 and 5-28 1 A-1 and A-2 0
1-3 and 1-4 3 5-29 thru 5-30 0 A-3 thru A-6 3
1-5 and 1-6 1 5-31 and 5-32 3 B-1 and B-2 0
1-7 thru 1-18 0 5-33 thru 5-36 2 C-1 thru C-8 3
2-1 thru 2-4 0 6-1 thru 6-30 0 D-1 and D-2 0
2-5 and 2-6 1 6-31 and 6-32 2 E-1 thru E-4 0
3-1 and 3-2 0 6-33 thru 6-42 0 10-1 thru 10-42 3
3-3 thru 3-6 1 6-43 thru 6-54 1 Index-1 thru Index-6 3

Please verify that you are using the latest revision of this document. Information pertaining
to this document is maintained on GPC (GE Medical Systems Global Product Configuration).
If you need to know the latest revision, contact the GE Ultrasound Clinical Answer Center at
1-800-682-5327 or 414-524-5255.

46-030370 REV 3 REVISION HISTORY A


This page intentionally left blank.

B REVISION HISTORY 46-030370 REV 3


Table of Contents

SECTION PAGE

Revision History ................................................................................................................................................ A

Table of Contents ................................................................................................................................................ i

Safety ................................................................................................................................................................ ix

Report on Publication

SECTION 1—INTRODUCTION

1-1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 1-3


1-2 Features ............................................................................................................................................. 1-3
1-3 Standard Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 1-4
1-4 Available Options ................................................................................................................................1-4
1-5 Standard Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 1-5
1-6 RT 3200 Advantage - I Dimensions ................................................................................................... 1-6
1-7 Hardware Description ........................................................................................................................ 1-8
1-8 Display Formats ...............................................................................................................................1-10
1-8-1 Single B-Mode Format ........................................................................................................ 1-10
1-8-2 Dual B-Mode Format ........................................................................................................... 1-11
1-8-3 B/M-Mode Format ................................................................................................................ 1-11
1-9 System Set-up ..................................................................................................................................1-12
1-9-1 Connection of a Probe to the System ................................................................................. 1-12
1-9-2 Probe Storage & Cable Arm Support .................................................................................. 1-13
1-9-3 Power-up .............................................................................................................................1-14
1-9-4 Adjustment of Monitor Contrast and Brightness ................................................................. 1-15
1-9-5 Monitor Height Adjustment .................................................................................................. 1-16
1-9-6 Foot Switch Connection ...................................................................................................... 1-18

SECTION 2—FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD

2-1 Description of Front Panel ................................................................................................................. 2-3

46-030370 REV 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS i


Table of Contents (continued)

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 3—DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION

3-1 Entering Patient Information .............................................................................................................. 3-3


3-1-1 New Patient Key ................................................................................................................... 3-3
3-1-2 ID/Name Key ........................................................................................................................ 3-3
3-2 Selecting a Probe ...............................................................................................................................3-3
3-3 Scan Image Adjustment ..................................................................................................................... 3-4
3-3-1 Echo Gain Control ................................................................................................................ 3-4
3-3-2 TGC Slide Pots ..................................................................................................................... 3-4
3-3-3 Dynamic Range .................................................................................................................... 3-4
3-3-4 Focus Selections .................................................................................................................. 3-5
3-3-5 Image Direction Keys ........................................................................................................... 3-5
3-3-6 Display Scale Keys ............................................................................................................... 3-5
3-3-7 Image Scroll Keys ................................................................................................................. 3-6
3-3-8 Preset Parameters Key ......................................................................................................... 3-7
3-3-9 B-Mode Display Selection ..................................................................................................... 3-7
3-3-10 B/M-Mode Display Selection ................................................................................................. 3-8
3-3-11 M-Mode Display Selection .................................................................................................... 3-8
3-3-12 Sweep Speed ....................................................................................................................... 3-9
3-3-13 Multiple Image Display .......................................................................................................... 3-9
3-3-14 Freeze Key ..........................................................................................................................3-12
3-3-15 Body Pattern Controls ........................................................................................................ 3-12
3-3-16 Comment Key ..................................................................................................................... 3-14
3-3-17 Keyboard Illumination ......................................................................................................... 3-14
3-3-18 Record Key ..........................................................................................................................3-14
3-3-19 Ext Video Key ..................................................................................................................... 3-14
3-4 Measurement Keys ...........................................................................................................................3-15
3-5 Function Keys ...................................................................................................................................3-16
3-6 Single Keystroke Operation ............................................................................................................. 3-16

SECTION 4—GENERIC MEASUREMENTS

4-1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 4-3


4-2 Distance Measurement ...................................................................................................................... 4-4
4-3 Circumference Measurement ............................................................................................................ 4-6
4-4 Area Measurement .............................................................................................................................4-8
4-5 Measurement Calculation Error Messages ...................................................................................... 4-10

ii TABLE OF CONTENTS 46-030370 REV 3


Table of Contents (continued)

SECTION PAGE

SECTION 5—CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS

5-1 B-Mode Presetting ..............................................................................................................................5-4


5-2 Clock Readjustment ...........................................................................................................................5-5
5-3 Text/Graphics Display On/Off ............................................................................................................ 5-7
5-4 Echo Level .......................................................................................................................................... 5-8
5-4-1 Echo Level Measurement (fixed area) .................................................................................. 5-8
5-4-2 Echo Level Measurement (arbitrary area) ............................................................................ 5-9
5-5 Histogram ......................................................................................................................................... 5-12
5-5-1 Histogram (fixed area) ........................................................................................................ 5-12
5-5-2 Histogram (an arbitrary area) .............................................................................................. 5-13
5-6 Film Development Time ................................................................................................................... 5-15
5-7 Gestational Data ...............................................................................................................................5-16
5-7-1 Programming Gestational Age Data ................................................................................... 5-16
5-7-2 Editing Gestational Age Data .............................................................................................. 5-18
5-8 Hospital Name ..................................................................................................................................5-20
5-9 Inverse .............................................................................................................................................. 5-21
5-10 Body Pattern Package ..................................................................................................................... 5-22
5-11 High Frame Rate On/Off .................................................................................................................. 5-24
5-12 Biopsy Guideline ..............................................................................................................................5-25
5-13 Map Package ...................................................................................................................................5-33
5-14 Dotted Line On/Off............................................................................................................................5-33
5-15 Record Output (Gamma Curve Selection) ....................................................................................... 5-34
5-16 Frame Averaging On/Off ................................................................................................................. 5-35

SECTION 6—FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS

6-1 OB Tbl 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 6-4


6-1-1 BPD (Biparietal Diameter) .................................................................................................... 6-4
6-1-2 CRL (Crown Rump Length) .................................................................................................. 6-6
6-1-3 FL (Femur Length) ................................................................................................................ 6-8
6-1-4 AC (Abdominal Circumference) .......................................................................................... 6-10
6-1-5 HC (Head Circumference) .................................................................................................. 6-12
6-1-6 AC/HC (Two Diameter Method) .......................................................................................... 6-14
6-2 OB Tbl 2 ........................................................................................................................................... 6-15
6-2-1 Programming Gestational Age Data ................................................................................... 6-16
6-2-2 Editing Gestational Age Data .............................................................................................. 6-18
6-3 Calc 1 ............................................................................................................................................... 6-22
6-3-1 Circumference .................................................................................................................... 6-23
6-3-2 Volume .................................................................................................................................6-25
6-3-3 Heart Rate ...........................................................................................................................6-33
6-3-4 Velocity ................................................................................................................................6-35
6-3-5 A/B (Calculation of Ratio) ................................................................................................... 6-37

46-030370 REV 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS iii


Table of Contents (continued)

SECTION PAGE

6-4 Calc 2 ............................................................................................................................................... 6-39


6-4-1 Estimated Date of Confinement .......................................................................................... 6-40
6-4-2 Estimated Fetal Body Weight ....................................................................................................
6-41
6-4-3 Stepper Volume .................................................................................................................. 6-43
6-4-4 Amniotic Fluid Index ........................................................................................................... 6-54
6-5 Mapping ............................................................................................................................................ 6-57

SECTION 7—UROLOGY OPTIONS

7-1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 7-3


7-2 Basic Urology Measurements ............................................................................................................ 7-3
7-3 7.0 MHz Transaxial Probe ................................................................................................................. 7-3
7-3-1 Description .............................................................................................................................7-3
7-3-2 Parts List ................................................................................................................................7-3
7-3-3 RA Probe Factory Presets .................................................................................................... 7-4
7-3-4 RA Probe Preparation .......................................................................................................... 7-4
7-3-5 Transrectal Scanning—with Water Path (OPTIONAL) ......................................................... 7-5
7-3-6 Use of RA Probe with Volume Stepper Device ..................................................................... 7-5
7-3-7 System Preparation .............................................................................................................. 7-7
7-3-8 Infection Control ................................................................................................................... 7-7
7-3-9 Patient Preparation for Transrectal Imaging ......................................................................... 7-7
7-3-10 Patient Scan ......................................................................................................................... 7-9
7-3 Mechanical Stepper/Needle Placement Guide ................................................................................ 7-13
7-3-1 Parts Identification .............................................................................................................. 7-13
7-3-2 Control/Adjustment Description .......................................................................................... 7-15
7-3-3 Alternate Assembly ............................................................................................................. 7-17
7-3-4 Lithotomy (Stirrup) Table Mounting ..................................................................................... 7-19
7-3-5 Typical Use ..........................................................................................................................7-20
7-3-6 Periodic Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 7-21
7-3-7 Cleaning and Sterilization ................................................................................................... 7-22
7-3-8 Replacement Parts ............................................................................................................. 7-22
7-4 Stepper Volume Calculation ............................................................................................................ 7-23
7-4-1 Stepper Volume Formula .................................................................................................... 7-23
7-4-2 Basic Principles of Operation .............................................................................................. 7-24
7-4-3 Stepper Volume Increment Selection ................................................................................. 7-25
7-4-4 Scan Preparation ................................................................................................................ 7-26
7-4-5 Area Measurements for Each Slice (Step Increment) ......................................................... 7-28

SECTION 8—ACCESSORIES

8-1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................ 8-3


8-2 Accessory Panels ...............................................................................................................................8-3
8-2-1 Lower Accessory Panel ........................................................................................................ 8-3
8-2-2 Upper Accessory Panel ........................................................................................................ 8-5

iv TABLE OF CONTENTS 46-030370 REV 3


Table of Contents (continued)

SECTION PAGE

8-3 Sony Video Graphic Printer Installation ............................................................................................. 8-6


8-3-1 System Disassembly ............................................................................................................ 8-6
8-3-2 Page Printer Power Hook-up ................................................................................................ 8-6
8-3-3 System Re-assembly ............................................................................................................ 8-7
8-3-4 Mount and Secure Printer Shelf ............................................................................................ 8-8
8-3-5 Mount and Connect the Printer ............................................................................................. 8-8
8-4 Panasonic AG-5200/AG-1260/AG-1270/ Sony SVO-1410 Basic Installation .................................. 8-10
8-4-1 System Disassembly .......................................................................................................... 8-10
8-4-2 VCR Power Hook-up .......................................................................................................... 8-10
8-4-3 System Re-assembly .......................................................................................................... 8-10
8-4-4 Mount and Connect VCR ..................................................................................................... 8-11
8-5 Connecting A Multi-Image Camera .................................................................................................. 8-14

SECTION 9—APPENDICES

APPENDIX A—CONTROL PARAMETERS

A-1 Control Parameters ........................................................................................................................... A-1


A-2 Control Parameters Which Affect Acoustic Sound ............................................................................. A-1

APPENDIX B—ACOUSTIC LEVEL NOTES

B-1 Acoustic Level Notes ......................................................................................................................... B-1


B-2 Measurement Basis for Probe Output ............................................................................................... B-1

APPENDIX C—CLEANING AND INSPECTING

C-1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... C-1


C-2 Probe Cleaning .................................................................................................................................. C-1
C-3 Disinfection ........................................................................................................................................ C-2
C-4 Gas Sterilization ................................................................................................................................ C-3
C-5-1 Console Surfaces ................................................................................................................. C-7
C-5-2 Monitor Face and Filter ......................................................................................................... C-7
C-5 System Cleaning ............................................................................................................................... C-7
C-5-3 Video Cassette Recorder ...................................................................................................... C-8
C-5-4 Multi-Imaging Device ............................................................................................................ C-8
C-5-5 Page Printer .......................................................................................................................... C-8
C-6 Monthly Inspection............................................................................................................................. C-8

APPENDIX D—TROUBLESHOOTING

D-1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... D-1


D-2 Troubleshooting the RT 3200 Advantage - I ...................................................................................... D-1
D-3 Troubleshooting the Page Printer ...................................................................................................... D-2

46-030370 REV 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS v


Table of Contents (continued)

SECTION PAGE

APPENDIX E—MAINTENANCE

E-1 Check-up and Service ....................................................................................................................... E-1


E-2 How to Store the Unit ........................................................................................................................ E-1
E-3 How to Move a Unit ........................................................................................................................... E-2
E-4 Monitor Preparation and Installation .................................................................................................. E-3
E-5 Removing the Monitor ....................................................................................................................... E-4

SECTION 10—RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES

10-1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 10-3


10-2 Ellipse Measurement Function ........................................................................................................ 10-4
10-3 HIP Dysplasia Calculation ............................................................................................................... 10-6
10-4 Estimated Fetal Body Weight —Third Calculation ........................................................................... 10-9
10-5 Gestational Summary Report Page ............................................................................................... 10-10
10-5-1 Overview ............................................................................................................................10-10
10-5-2 Displaying and Exiting the Report Page ........................................................................... 10-11
10-5-3 Editing the Report Page.................................................................................................... 10-11
10-5-4 Edit Fields ..........................................................................................................................10-13
10-5-5 Independent Data Fields ................................................................................................... 10-15
10-5-6 Dependent Data Fields ..................................................................................................... 10-20
10-5-7 Gestational Age Error Markers ......................................................................................... 10-21
10-5-8 Hardcopy Output of the Report Page ............................................................................... 10-22
10-5-9 Gestational Age Estimation .............................................................................................. 10-23
10-5-10 Measurement Averaging Page ......................................................................................... 10-24
10-6 Report Page Sequencing .............................................................................................................. 10-25
10-7 Measurement Averaging Page ...................................................................................................... 10-26
10-7-1 Overview ............................................................................................................................10-26
10-7-2 The Report Display ........................................................................................................... 10-26
10-7-4 Average All ........................................................................................................................10-27
10-7-3 Editing the Page ............................................................................................................... 10-27
10-8 Anatomical Survey Report Page ................................................................................................... 10-28
10-8-1 Page Description .............................................................................................................. 10-28
10-8-2 Editing the Page ............................................................................................................... 10-29
10-8-3 Comments .........................................................................................................................10-29
10-8-4 User Programmed Features ............................................................................................. 10-29
10-9 User Programmable Comments Library ........................................................................................ 10-30
10-9-1 Overview ............................................................................................................................10-30
10-9-2 Selecting the Comments Library ....................................................................................... 10-30
10-9-3 Programming Comments .................................................................................................. 10-31
10-9-4 Editing the Comments Library .......................................................................................... 10-32
10-9-5 Using the Comments Library ............................................................................................ 10-33
10-9-6 No Code ............................................................................................................................10-33
10-10 Urology Summary Report Page ..................................................................................................... 10-34
10-10-1 Overview ............................................................................................................................10-34
10-10-2 Urology Page Edit Fields .................................................................................................. 10-35
10-10-3 Display Urology Report Page ........................................................................................... 10-36

vi TABLE OF CONTENTS 46-030370 REV 3


Table of Contents (continued)

SECTION PAGE

10-11 Record Output—Line Printer ......................................................................................................... 10-36


10-12 Prostate Body Marker Patterns ..................................................................................................... 10-37
10-13 Calc 3 ............................................................................................................................................. 10-38
10-14 Cine Memory Operation (OPTION) ............................................................................................... 10-39
10-14-1 Overview ............................................................................................................................10-39
10-14-2 Single Image Operation .................................................................................................... 10-39
10-14-3 Multiple Image Operation .................................................................................................. 10-40

46-030370 REV 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS vii


This page intentionally left blank.

viii TABLE OF CONTENTS 46-030370 REV 3


SAFETY

The following is intended to make the equipment user aware of particular


hazards associated with the use of this equipment and the extent to which
injury can occur if precautions are not observed.

Additional precautions may be provided throughout the manual. The user


is obligated to be familiar with these concerns and avoid conditions that
could result in injury.

Before using the equipment, carefully study this manual. Keep this manual
at hand for quick reference. Review it periodically for warnings, safety
precautions and maintenance requirements.

WARNINGS AND SYMBOLS

Precautionary statements and warning labels are provided in various


locations on your RT 3200 console and throughout this manual to alert the
user to hazards or situations that could result in injury to equipment damage.
Symbols are often used with these warnings to increase user awareness
and emphasize particular hazards. The user should become familiar with
the meaning of symbols and the intent of all product warnings and precau-
tionary statements.

Various levels of safety precaution are highlighted in this manual by the


following symbols and flag words which precede the precautionary state-
ment.

CAUTION
Indicates that a potential hazard may exist which
through inappropriate conditions or actions will
or can cause:

• Minor injury
• Property damage.

WARNING
Indicates that a specific hazard is known to exist
which through inappropriate conditions or ac-
tions may cause:

• Severe personal injury


• Substantial property damage.

DANGER
Indicates that a specific hazard is known to exist
which through inappropriate conditions or ac-
tions will cause:

• Severe or fatal personal injury


• Substantial property damage.

46-030370 REV 1 WARNING AND PREFACE ix


WARNINGS AND SYMBOLS (continued)

Indicates a note or attention statement. This will


be used for:

• Noting or emphasizing a necessary operator


action
• Step or time saving recommendations.

Symbols may also be used to identify particular hazards associated with the
precautionary statement. The following symbols are used for the purpose
indicated and may be used in combination with the level of concern symbols
as described above:

Electrical Electrical Potential Hazard:


Hazard
• Electrical micro-shock to patient, i.e. ven-
tricular fibrillation initiated
• Electrical macro-shock to patient/user.

Explosion Explosion Potential Hazard:


Hazard
• Risk of explosion if used in the presence of
flammable anesthetics.

Biological Biological Potential Hazard:


Hazard
• Patient/user infection due to contaminated
equipment
• Patient/user injury or adverse reaction to
contact materials.

Acoustic Acoustic Output Potential Hazard:


Output
Hazard • Patient injury or tissue damage from ultra-
sound radiation.

x WARNING AND PREFACE 46-030370 REV 1


WARNINGS AND SYMBOLS (continued)

Additionally, the following symbols have the meaning as indicated:

"ATTENTION—Consult accompanying docu-


! ments" is intended to alert the user to refer to the
operator manual or other instructions when com-
plete information cannot be provided on the
label.

"Main OFF" indicates the power off position of


the main power switch.

"Main ON" indicates the power on position of the


main power switch.

"VCR" indicates controls or connections related


to a video cassette recorder.

"Protective Earth" indicates the protective earth


(grounding) terminal.

"Equipotentiality" indicates the terminal to be


used for connecting equipotential conductors
when interconnecting (grounding) with other
equipment.

46-030370 REV 1 WARNING AND PREFACE xi


PATIENT SAFETY

WARNING The concerns listed below can seriously affect the safety of patient under-
going a diagnostic ultrasound examination.

Patient Identification Always include proper identification with all pa-


tient data and verify the accuracy of the patient's
name or ID numbers when entering such data.
Make sure correct patient ID is provided on all
recorded data and hard copy prints. Identifica-
tion errors could result in an incorrect diagnosis.

Diagnostic Information Equipment malfunction or incorrect settings can


result in measurement errors or failure to detect
details within the image. The equipment user
must become thoroughly familiar with the equip-
ment operation in order to optimize its perfor-
mance and recognize possible malfunctions.
Applications training is available through your
GE representative. Added confidence in your
equipment operation can be gained by estab-
lishing a quality assurance program.

Mechanical Hazards Damaged probes or improper use and manipu-


lation of intracavitary probes can result in injury
or increased risk of infection. Inspect probes
often for sharp, pointed, or rough surface dam-
age that could cause injury or tear protective
barriers. Never use excessive force when ma-
nipulating intracavitary probes. Become famil-
iar with all instructions and precautions provided
with special purpose probes.

Electrical Hazards A damaged probe may cause an electrically


hazardous condition when coupled to the human
body. Before each use, inspect the probe for
cracks or openings in the cable, aperture,
headshell, shaft or body.
Do not use a damaged probe to scan patients. A
damaged probe may also produce inaccurate
scan images.

Acoustic Hazards Although there have been no confirmed adverse


effects produced by diagnostic levels of ultra-
sound, avoid unnecessary prolonged exposure
to the human body.
Follow the principle of "as low as reasonably
achievable" when scanning patients. Once an
optimal image is achieved, the need for increas-
ing acoustic output or prolonging the exposure
can not be justified.
Acoustic intensities for this device are below
FDA specified limits for the indicated clinical
applications and will not be exceeded for any
system control setting combinations.

xii WARNING AND PREFACE 46-030370 REV 1


EQUIPMENT AND PERSONNEL SAFETY

DANGER Risk of explosion if used in the presence of flammable anesthetics.

Electrical Risk of Electric Shock This equipment contains dangerous voltages


Hazard that are capable of serious injury or death. To
avoid injury:

• Do not remove protective covers. No user


serviceable parts are inside. Refer servicing
to qualified service personnel.

• To assure adequate grounding, connect the


attachment plug to a reliable (hospital grade)
grounding outlet. Do not use a two prong AC
adapter.

• Do not place liquids on or above the console.


Spilled liquid may contact live parts and
increase the risk or shock.

Infection Control For patient and personnel safety, beware of


biological hazards while performing invasive
procedures. To avoid the risk of disease trans-
mission:

• Use protective barriers (gloves and probe


sheaths) whenever possible. Follow sterile
procedures when appropriate.

• Thoroughly clean probes and reusable ac-


cessories after each patient examination
and disinfect or sterilize as needed.

• Follow all infection control policies estab-


lished by your office, department or institu-
tion as they apply to personnel and equip-
ment.

Prescription Device CAUTION: Federal law restricts this device to


sale or use by or on the order of a physician.

Only qualified sonographers should perform


ultrasound scanning on human subjects for
medical diagnostic reasons.

46-030370 REV 1 WARNING AND PREFACE xiii


EQUIPMENT AND PERSONNEL SAFETY (continued)

Calculation Formulas Calculation formulas and databases are provided


and Databases only as a tool and should not be considered as
an undisputed database in which clinical diag-
nosis can be made. Research should be done
on the articles. Output data from this device
should be sampled. A judgement can then be
made as to the utility of this device and the
calculation results as a clinical tool.

Refer to the bibliographies annotated with each


table.

xiv WARNING AND PREFACE 46-030370 REV 1


SECTION 1

INTRODUCTION

Overview

Features

Standard Configuration

Available Options

Standard Specifications

RT 3200 Advantage - I Dimensions

Hardware Description

Display Formats

System Set-up

46-030370 REV 0 INTRODUCTION 1-1


This page intentionally left blank.

1-2 INTRODUCTION 46-030370 REV 0


SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION

1-1 Overview
The RT 3200 Advantage - I is an ultrasonic diagnostic system equipped for
linear, convex and micro-convex scanning. It may be used in many areas such
as obstetrics, gynecology, urology and radiology. The optional 7 MHz transrec-
tal probe gives the RT 3200 Advantage - I urology scanning capabilities.

The RT 3200 Advantage - I produces high-quality images employing


dynamic focus on transmit and continuous focus on receive. It is equipped
with functions to enhance the clinical diagnosis, such as display mode
selections, measurements and calculations.

The affordable price, advanced features and options, probe selections, size,
weight and portability make the RT 3200 Advantage - I an ideal system for
the office or hospital.

1-2 Features
1. High Resolution Image
Provides high resolution by using continuous dynamic focus, a high-
density probe with multiple matching layers, and hypersensitive elec-
tronic circuitry.

2. Multiple Diagnostic Functions


RT 3200 Advantage I has various functions useful for daily diagnosis
such as various display modes, image optimization, measurements
and calculations.

3. Programmable Preset Function


B-Mode preset function enables the user to program optimum values
such as gain for each probe type in advance. This makes a diagnosis
more efficient because the preset conditions will be retained even after
the power switch is turned off or a different probe is selected.

4. Scroll
This function is available for linear and convex probes, which broadens
a diagnostic area.

5. Analog TGC
By using eight slide-type analog TGC pots, the sonographer is able to
optimize the RT 3200 Advantage - I image.

6. Sophisticated Console Design


The design of RT 3200 Advantage - I is excellent from the human
engineering point of view. The height of the monitor can be adjusted to suit
everyone's viewing needs. It is lightweight, compact and very portable.

7. Optional Probe Types


The RT 3200 Advantage - I will accept a wide variety of scanning probes
from linear, to convex, to transvaginal for OB, and transrectal for
urology studies.

3
46-030370 REV 02 INTRODUCTION 1-3
1-3 Standard Configuration
Unit
• Operation console
• TV monitor (12 inches)

Probe
• Convex electronic probe (CB type)
• Cable hook arm
• Probe holder

Record
• Thermal Printer

Accessories
• Ultrasonic scan gel
• Spare fuse
• Conversion connector
• Operator manual
• Foot switch

1-4 Available Options


Probe related options
• A type linear electronic probe (5MHz, 40mm FOV)
• B type linear electronic probe (3.5MHz, 85mm FOV)
• C type linear electronic probe (3.5MHz, 130mm FOV)
• D type linear electronic probe (3.5MHz, 85mm FOV, biopsy)

• E type linear electronic probe (5MHz, 85mm FOV)


• F type linear electronic probe (5MHz, 54mm FOV, operation)
• G type linear electronic probe (5MHz, 54mm FOV, body cavity)
• H type linear electronic probe (7.5MHz, 60mm FOV)

• LP type linear electronic probe (7.5Mhz, 63mm FOV, small parts/breast)

• S type convex electronic probe (3.5 MHz, 80°)


• R type micro-convex electronic probe (7MHz, endocavitary)
• RA type micro-convex electronic probe (7MHz transrectal)
• MZ type convex electronic probe (6.5 MHz, 120°, endocavitary)

• CA type convex electronic probe (5MHz, 60°, 40mm radius)


• CB type convex electronic probe (3.5MHz, 60°, 40mm radius)
• CC type convex electronic probe (3.5 MHz, 60°, 80mm radius)
• CK (CF) type convex electronic probe (3.5 MHz, 73°, 50mm radius)

• CV type micro-convex electronic probe (5MHz, 80°, transvaginal)


• ATF type micro-convex electronic probe (5MHz, 120°, transvaginal)
• ATV type micro-convex electronic probe (5MHz, 95°, transvaginal)

Recording Devices
• VCR
• Multi-format camera

1-4 INTRODUCTION 32
46-030370 REV 0
1-5 Standard Specifications

Scanning : Convex and linear electronic scanning


Display mode : B-, B/M-, M-Mode
Beam focus : Real-time continuous dynamic focus on receive. Selectable and combi-
nation focus on transmit
Scale : 4 depth selections
Display Monitor : 12 inch monochrome
Dynamic range : 30 - 72dB (6dB steps)
Gain : 0 - 99dB (1dB steps)
TGC : 8 slide pots (at fixed depths)
Post process : Gray Scale Mapping selections
Vertical Scroll : Micro-convex probe/linear probe (Mode dependent)
Memory : 32 frame, continuous loop Cine memory (optional)
Measurements : Distance: 4 results simultaneously
Circumference: 4 results simultaneously by 3 methods
Area: 4 results simultaneously
Calculation : Circumference, velocity, volume, ratio, etc.
OB Calc Package
Gestation table : 2 Tables. 5 selections per table (5 factory stored and 5 user programmable)
Biopsy guidelines : Varies with probe type.
Image direction : Invert/Reverse RT 3200 Advantage - I display
Body markers : Abdomen, OB/GYN, Neck and Head
Text display : Alphanumeric keyboard
Automatic display : Clock, scan parameters & probe type.
Weight (lb) : Approx. 182 lb
Tall version approx. 189 lb
Temperature/Humidity
Requirements : Operating: 50°-99.9°F (10°-40°C) at 30-75% Relative Humidity (RH)
Heat Dissipation: 650/BTU per hour (1 person = 300 BTU per hour)
Storage: 32°-122°F (0°-50°C) at 10-85% RH
Transport: 32°-122°F (0°-50°C) at 5-80% RH

Electrical Requirements : Line: Domestic (115V)—for unit as shipped, 115V~, 48-63 Hz, single-
phase, fused at T2 amps.
Line: International (220/240V)—for unit as shipped, 220/240V~, 48-63
Hz, single-phase, fused at T2 amps.
Allowable Line Noise: Decaying oscillation transients of less than 15%
nominal peak voltage; voltage transients of less
than 25% nominal peak voltage.
System Leakage Current: Enclosure or chassis—less than 100 microamps.
Ordinary Patient Connections—less than 50
microamps.

46-030370 REV 012 INTRODUCTION 1-5


1-6 RT 3200 Advantage - I
Dimensions

Illustration 1-1
Front View System Dimensions

▲ ▲

15.9 (405)

*52 (1300)
48 (1200)
* = TALL VERSION
UNITS = INCHES (MM)

*33.8 (859)
31.3 (795)

RS-232C Ext TV Ext TV Camera & 12Vdc Foot Switch


TV Printer for Camera
In Out In Out Video Out Shutter
Caution
See Operating Manual
for connection.
6.4 (162)

▼ ▼ ▼

15.7 (400)

1-6 INTRODUCTION 46-030370 REV 0


12
Illustration 1-2
Side View System Dimensions

31.8 (808)
< 28.3 (720)
>
< >

UNITS = INCHES (MM)

46-030370 REV 0 INTRODUCTION 1-7


1-7 Hardware Description
See Illustration 1-3 which note the following:

1. Power switch
Used to turn on/off the main AC power to the system.

2. Probe arm
Used to support the probe cable. Keeps the cable off of the floor.

3. Probe holder, gel holder


Used to hold scan probes and scan gel.

4. Upper panel
Used to connect a VCR or page printer. (Under top coverplate)

5. Alphanumeric Keyboard
Used to change scan parameters, enter the text, or to select various
function menus.

6. 12-inch monochrome monitor


It displays the ultrasound image and scan parameter data.

7. Adjustment of contrast and brightness


These controls adjust the contrast and brightness of the display to the
operators preference.

8. Adjustment of monitor height


The height of the monitor can be adjusted by pressing and holding this
button while raising and lowering the monitor.

9. Probe connectors
Connects up to two probes to the system at one time.

10. Front panel


Used to connect the system to a camera, VCR, page printer or external
monitor.

11. Wheel locks


Used to lock wheel rotation in order to prevent accidental system
movement. To lock wheels, depress the lever with your foot.

12. Handle
Used to aid in the movement of the system and to wrap power cord
around when transporting.

1-8 INTRODUCTION 46-030370 REV 0


Illustration 1-3
Hardware Description

7 4
8
5
2
1

12

3
9
2

RS-232C Ext TV
In
Ext TV
Out In Out
Camera &
TV Printer
Video Out Shutter
12Vdc
for Camera
Caution
Foot Switch
10
See Operating Manual
for connection.

11

46-030370 REV 0 INTRODUCTION 1-9


1-8 Display Formats

1-8-1 Single B-Mode


Format

Illustration 1-4
Single B-Mode Format
Name of Hospital Scan Direction Indicator Horizontal Range Marker

GE
GE
G 2
MMeE
eddiiccaall 2
2
Date M
004//1d
4 155 i //99l11
Time 110
0::5599::4455
Probe Type Frequency C
B B 3
0.5M5M HHzH z
Scale Size
Cx33
B 1.51
B 35 M
0
xx 11..0..0
MH
zz
1100
D++
D
Distance D
Dxx++
D
xxxx
xxx
x
Cxxx++
C
C x++
Cxx
Circumference
Cxxxx
A
A+ + Vertical
Axxxx Depth
xxxx
x Marker
Area Ax+x+
A
x
xx
xx

Area for Calc Display


ID:
ID:
ID I1D
234
12:34
1234
Patient name NA
N MEE::
AM
SMMIIT
S H
TH
JO
OHN
J HN G46D66T50

Gain Body Pattern


Dynamic Range
Transmitting Focus

1-10 INTRODUCTION 46-030370 REV 0


1-8-2 Dual B-Mode
Format
Illustration 1-5 Scan Direction
Dual B-Mode Format ←
GGEE 2
MG
ME eddiiccaall
e 2
2
04
0 4/115 5/9911
1B
1003::.5599M:4 5
B3.5MHz
:4H5z
C
B B
3
1 3
5
0 M5MH H
Hzz
x 1..0. z
xC B 3 .5 M
CB
1305MH
D++
D
xx
x
xx
C++
C
Cxx
xx
xx
A+
Axx+
xx
xx

ID:
ID:
I1D
234
12:34
1234
NAAMMEE::
N
SM
S MIITTHH
JOHN G46D66T50
JOHN

Body Pattern Displays

1-8-3 B/M-Mode Format

Scan Direction
Illustration 1-6 ←
B/M-Mode Format GGEE
G
MeE 2
2
M eddiiccaall 2
04
0 4/115 5//9911
11
C003B
:559 :4
B :3 9M
.55:MH55zHz
4M
BC3B..35.M HzHz
C
B 3B 30M
15
xx1..0 z z
5M HH
10
D++
D
xx
x
xx
C
C+ +
Cxx
xx
xx+
A+
Axx+
xx
xx

ID:
ID:
I1D
234
1234
1234
NAAMMEE::
N
SMMIITTHH
S
JOHN G46D66T50
JOHN

Body Pattern Display

46-030370 REV 0 INTRODUCTION 1-11


1-9 System Set-up

1-9-1 Connection of a
Probe to the
System

Illustration 1-7
Probe Connection

1. Insert a RT 3200 Advantage - I probe into the Probe 1 or Probe 2


connectors located on the panel below the keyboard. (See Illustration
1-3.)

2. Lock the probe to the system connector by turning the knob clockwise.
(See Illustration 1-7.)

CAUTION Make sure that the name of the probe is right side up.

1-12 INTRODUCTION 46-030370 REV 0


1-9-2 Probe Storage &
Cable Arm
Support

Illustration 1-8
Probe Storage

Cable arm

Probe holder

1. Place the probe element assembly in the probe holder, as shown in


Illustration 1-8.

2. Drape the probe cable on to the cable arm support also shown in
Illustration 1-8.

CAUTION The probe element face is fragile. Mechanical shock could destroy
individual probe elements.

46-030370 REV 0 INTRODUCTION 1-13


1-9-3 Power-up

Turn on system power by pressing the power switch to the "I" (ON) position.

1. After the power switch is turned on, the system will beep twice.

2. The LEDs on the front panel will flash on and the system performs its
initialization routine.

3. A few seconds later, the single B-Mode display format will appear on the
monitor. The initial parameters at power up are shown in Table 1-1.

NOTE: Ideally, the unit needs to warm up for 30 minutes before it is


ready and stabilized.

Table 1-1
Initial Parameter Selections

Initial Parameter Selections

MODE B (LED ON)


FUNCTION SELECTIONS OFF
FOCUS
SCALE
GAIN Values depend on B-Mode parameter
DYNAMIC RANGE presets programmed for the probe
MAP selected.
IMAGE INVERSE
IMAGE REVERSE

1-14 INTRODUCTION 46-030370 REV 0


1-9-4 Adjustment of
Monitor Contrast
and Brightness
Adjust the brightness and contrast of the display to the room lighting by using
the controls under the left, front corner of the monitor (see Illustration 1-9).

1. This control adjusts the brightness. The brightness will increase as the
control is turned counterclockwise.

2. This control adjusts contrast. The picture will become lighter as the
control is turned counterclockwise.

Illustration 1-9
Monitor Display Adjustment

1 2

46-030370 REV 0 INTRODUCTION 1-15


1-16
Adjustment
1-9-5 Monitor Height

INTRODUCTION
!
To avoid injury by tipping over, SET THE MONITOR TO THE LOWEST POSITION BEFORE MOVING.
Pour éviter ie basculement accidentel de la machine, BAISSER LE MONITEUR AVANT DÉPLACEMENT. To avoid injury by tipping over, DO NOT PUSH THIS UNIT FROM THE SIDES.
Um bei bewegung des Gerätes Beschädigungen zu vermeiden, STELLEN SIE DEN MONITOR AUF Pour éviter ie basculement accidentel de la machine, NE PAS LA POUSSER PAR LE CÔTÉ.
DIE NIEDRIGSTE POSITION EIN. Um bei bewegung des Gerätes Beschädigungen zu vermeiden, SCHIEBEN SIE DEN
PREDISPORRE IL MONITOR NELLA POSIZIONE PIU BASSA PRIMA DI MUOVERE la macchina per MONITOR NICHT VON DER SEITE.
evitare rischi di rottura. Per evitare rischi di rottura, NON SPINGERE LA MACCHINA DI LATO.
Para evitar daños por voltearse el sistema, POSICIONE EL MONITOR A SU NIVEL MÁS BAJO ANTES Para evitar daños por voltearse el sistema, NO MUEVA EL SISTEMA DESDE LOS LADOS.
DE MOVER EL SISTEMA.
possible before moving the unit.

46-030370 REV 0
Always lower the monitor as much as
Illustration 1-10
Monitor Height Adjustment

Adjustment Button

1-9-5 Monitor Height


Adjustment
(continued) To adjust the height of the display monitor, depress and hold down the
adjustment button.

While depressing the button, firmly raise or lower the display monitor to the
desired height.

Release the adjustment button to lock the monitor to the desired height.

46-030370 REV 0 INTRODUCTION 1-17


a
a
1-18
1-9-6 Foot Switch
Connection

Illustration 1-11
Foot Switch Connection

RS-232C

INTRODUCTION
Ext TV
In Out

a
A remote freeze foot switch is provided as standard equipment.

The foot switch is connected to the lower accessory panel as shown in


Illustration 1-11.

The foot switch can be placed close to your work in order to quickly and
conveniently capture the images necessary for measurement and record-
ing.

Ext TV
In Out

FREEZE
Camera &
TV Printer
Video Out Shutter
12Vdc
for Camera
Caution
See Operating Manual
for connection.

46-030370 REV 0
Foot Switch
SECTION 2

FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD

Description of Front Panel

46-030370 REV 0 FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD 2-1


This page intentionally left blank.

2-2 FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD 46-030370 REV 0


SECTION 2
FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD

Illustration 2-1
Front Panel

New ID Ext Key 1


Patient Name Comment Erase Preset Video Light Probe
2

Function
( ) ? ! " = ~ + %
OB OB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - BS Tbl 1 Tbl 2

Q W E R T Y U I O P Calc 1 Calc 2

A S D F G H J K L Return Calc 3 Map

Shift Z X C V B N M . / Shift

Space Space Control Enter

Mode
Image Direction Body Pattern Measurement B B/M M
High Sweep
Speed
Low
Rvs Inv Rotation L R Dist Trace Off
Area
Focus
Center Sel Set Meas 1 2 3 4 Comb

- TGC + Scale
cm Depth
0
Dynamic Range x0.7 x1.0 x1.5 x2.0
20cm 15cm 10cm 7.5cm
2.5

5 Scroll
7.5 Record

10
Gain

12.5
Multi Image
15
Freeze
17.5

2-1 Description of Front


Panel

New
When this key is depressed the system will be reset to the same conditions
Patient as when the power was turned on. It erases all the data and measurements
of the preceding patients. It will not erase the body pattern.

Used to enter patient ID No. and NAME. Press once to enter ID. Press again
ID
Name to enter NAME. Press a third time to disable the function.

46-030370 REV 0 FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD 2-3


2-1 Description of Front
Panel (continued)

Used to enable the placement of comments in the image area. The


Comment
TRACKBALL can be used for cursor placement.

This key must be pressed twice in order to erase the image, comments,
Erase
measurements and calculations. This key will not erase Body Patterns.

Used to select preset scan parameters for the active probe. Parameters are
Preset programmable using the Control, B Function.

Ext This key enables an external video signal (i.e. VCR option) to be processed
Video through the system to the monitor.

Key This key will turn on or off the soft green backlight to the keyboard.
Light

1 Used to select a probe for scanning from the two that may be attached.
Probe
2

Function
OB OB
Tbl 1 Tbl 2
These keys are used to call up preset program menus to select OB
calculation tables, Advanced Calculation packages and Gray Scale Map-
Calc 1 Calc 2 ping selections.

Calc 3 Map

The Calc 3 selection is not operational in the RT 3200 Advantage - I.

Image Direction
The image display can be reversed (left and right), or inverted (top and
Rvs Inv
bottom) when the appropriate key is pressed.

Body Pattern
Rotation R
A group of body patterns will be enabled for display when these keys are
L
depressed.

Center Sel The rotation knob is used to rotate transducer position on body pattern.

2-4 FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD 46-030370 REV 0


2-1 Description of Front
Panel (continued)

Measurement
These keys will be used when measurement procedures are required.
Dist Trace Off
Area

Set Meas

- TGC +
cm These slide pots adjust the gain at 8 specific depth levels.
0

2.5

7.5

10

12.5

15

17.5

Dynamic Range
These keys are used to adjust dynamic range of the image in B- and M-
Modes.

Gain
This control is used to adjust the receiver gain in B- and M-Modes.

When in Freeze mode, this control is used to step frame by frame through
the optional 32 frame Cine memory found in Version 5 software.

Trackball
This control is used to move a cursor while making comments and to make
measurements.

46-030370 REV 01 FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD 2-5


2-1 Description of Front
Panel (continued)

Mode

B B/M M These keys are used to select a display mode format.

High Sweep
Speed This key is used to change the display speed in M-Mode.
Low

Focus

1 2 3 4 Comb These keys are used to assign the optimum transmit focal zone.

Scale
Depth

x0.7 x1.0 x1.5 x2.0 These keys are used to change the depth (magnification) of an image
20cm 15cm 10cm 7.5cm
display.

Scroll
These keys are used to scroll an image. It varies the depth at which the
displayed images start.

Record
This key is used to trigger a camera or page printer.

Multi Image

These keys are used to display and move between multiple image displays.

Freeze Used to freeze an image. Stops the acquisition of ultrasound data.

2-6 FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD 1


46-030370 REV 0
SECTION 3

DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION

Entering Patient Information

Selecting a Probe

Scan Image Adjustment

Measurement Keys

Function Keys

46-030370 REV 0 DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION 3-1


This page intentionally left blank.

3-2 DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION 46-030370 REV 0


SECTION 3
DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION

3-1 Entering Patient


Information

3-1-1 New Patient Key


This key is used to erase the image and data from the previous patient. All
ID/Name, image, scan parameters, comment cursor, measurement cursor,
New
Patient biopsy guidelines, body pattern and probe mark will be erased.

NOTE: If this key is depressed when the image is frozen, the freeze will
be released to return to the real-time mode. Scan parameters
will return to the preset values (See Control Key Functions
CONTROL, B)

3-1-2 ID/Name Key

Press this key once and the LED will light.


ID
Name
First, enter the patient’s ID number by using the alphanumeric keys (8 letters
x 2 lines maximum). When the ID/NAME key is pressed a second time, the
system will accept patient name input. Enter the patient’s name using the
alphanumeric keys (8 letters x 3 lines maximum). To correct any error, use
the BACKSPACE key.

When the ID and Name have been input correctly, press the ENTER key.
(The underline cursor and the ID/NAME LED will go off.)

NOTE: If the COMMENT key is pressed while entering the ID and/or


Name, the underline cursor and ID/NAME LED will go off and
the newly selected function will be enabled. When the ID/
NAME key is pressed while Name is being entered, the under-
line cursor and ID/NAME LED will go off. The information
which was put in before the key is depressed will remain on the
monitor.

3-2 Selecting a Probe

1
Probe Press this key to toggle between the two probes that can be attached to the
2
system simultaneously. An LED will light (1 or 2) to indicate the active probe.

46-030370 REV 1
0 DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION 3-3
3-3 Scan Image Adjustment

3-3-1 Echo Gain


Control
Gain The GAIN control knob is used to adjust the amplification of the returning
echoes.

Receiver gain increases as the knob is turned clockwise. It decreases as


the knob is turned counterclockwise. Gain is displayed on the monitor in a
range from 0 to 99dB in 1 dB increments.

In Freeze Mode, with Version 5 software, the GAIN control knob is used to
advance frames forward and backward through the optional 32 frame Cine
memory. Counterclockwise rotation advances back to previous image
frames. After frame 32, the display wraps around to the first frame.

Clockwise rotation advances frame by frame through optional Cine memory


in the opposite direction.

3-3-2 TGC Slide Pots


The TGC SLIDE POTS are used to adjust the gain at a specific depth.
- TGC +
cm The upper TGC slide pots corresponds to the body surface and the lower
0
TGC slide pots corresponds to the deeper part of the body. Adjust the slide
2.5 pot for the specific part of the image you wish to optimize. Move the slide
5
pot to the right of the center to increase gain or to the left of center to
decrease gain.
7.5

10

12.5

15

17.5

3-3-3 Dynamic Range


The DYNAMIC RANGE ARROW keys are used to adjust the echo level
Dynamic Range range displayed by the gray scale. Press the UP ARROW key to increase
Dynamic Range. The image will become softer with more shades of gray.
Press the DOWN ARROW key to decrease Dynamic Range. The image will
become more contrasty.

The dynamic range available is 30-72dB in 6dB increments.

3-4 DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION 46-030370 REV 0


1
3-3-4 Focus Selections
The 5 FOCUS keys are used to select the optimum focal zone for transmit.
Focus Keys 1-4 select single focus depths. The COMB key combines dynamic
1 2 3 4 Comb
focusing for depths 2, 3, 4. See Table 3-1 on the following page.

NOTE: The FOCUS function selects the transmit focus depth only.
The receive signal employs continuous dynamic focus.

Table 3-1
Focus Depth
Type H and LP
Focus Transmit Probe Transmit
Selection Focus Depth* Focus Depth

1 20mm 9mm
2 40mm 18mm
3 60mm 27mm
4 100mm 36mm
Comb 40, 60, 100mm 9, 18, 27mm

*For probes A, B, C, D, E, G, CA, CB, CC, CV.

3-3-5 Image Direction


Keys
The left-side and right-side orientation of an image can be reversed when
Image Direction the RVS key is depressed. The image will return to the opposite orientation
when the RVS key is depressed again.
Rvs Inv

The top and bottom image orientation can be inverted when the INV key is
depressed. The image orientation will return to the opposite state when the
key is depressed again.

NOTE: These functions do not work when an image is frozen.

3-3-6 Display Scale


Keys
Scale The SCALE function will determine the size of the image on the monitor. The
Depth
monitor will display the image according to the selected magnification. Four
x0.7 x1.0 x1.5 x2.0 scale sizes can be selected (x0.7, x1.0, x1.5, x2.0) by pressing the desired
20cm 15cm 10cm 7.5cm
key.

Magnification x0.7 x1 x1.5 x2.0


Depth (cm) 20 15 10 7.5

NOTE: With a 12 inch monitor, x1 yields an actual size image. The


width of the image is automatically decided based on a se-
lected magnification.

If a SCALE key is pressed when the image is frozen, the image will unfreeze
and become active.

46-030370 REV 01 DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION 3-5


3-3-7 Image Scroll
Keys
The SCROLL ARROW keys are used to move the image presentation up
Scroll in order to display deeper parts of the body. Linear and convex linear probes
can be scrolled in B-, B/M- and M-Modes. A numerical value of a scrolled
depth is displayed in the upper left side of the image in mm. This number
represents the distance from the top of the image to the skin line.

The UP ARROW key scrolls the image in the upward direction. The DOWN
ARROW key scrolls the image in the downward direction.

Illustration 3-1
Scrolled Image Display

NOTE: Frame-rate of a scrolled image may change slightly.

The SCROLL key does not function when the image is in freeze
or when the x0.7 scale factor is selected.

3-6 DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION 46-030370 REV 0


1
3-3-8 Preset
Parameters Key
By pressing this key, the system returns to the basic scan parameters stored
for the active probe. The system default parameters can be preset by using
Preset CONTROL, B keys (see page 5-4). The factory default presets set at the
time of shipment are as follows:

Gain 50dB
Dynamic Range 54dB
Focus Level 3

3-3-9 B-Mode Display


Selection
The three MODE keys used to select a display mode format.
B Press the B key to display B-Mode.

B-Mode is automatically selected when the power switch is turned on.

NOTE: If the B key is pressed in B/M-Mode or M-Mode, the system will


return to B-Mode and it will retain the current values in B-
Mode. Comments and measurements are erased when a
mode is switched.

Illustration 3-2
B-Mode Display
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
11 : 15 : 25
CA 5MHz
1.0

G66D54T60
GE

46-030370 REV 0 DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION 3-7


3-3-10 B/M-Mode
Display Selection
When the B/M key is pressed, the system will display B-Mode on the left side
of the display and M-Mode on the right side of the display.
B/M
An M-Mode sampling cursor will appear on the B-Mode display. The time
appears on the top of the M-Mode and depth scale appears on the right side
of the M-Mode. The M-Mode sampling cursor can be moved by using the
TRACKBALL. Both B- and M-Mode images can be scrolled (linear and
convex probes only). Dynamic Range and Gain adjustments affect the M-
Mode display only. TGC adjustments affect both B- and M-Mode displays.

Illustration 3-3
B/M-Mode Display

NOTE: If the B key is pressed in B/M-Mode or M-Mode, the system will


return to B-Mode and it will retain the current values in B-Mode.
Comments and measurements are erased when a mode is
switched.

3-3-11 M-Mode Display


Selection
When the M key is pressed, the system will display M-Mode only across the
entire display.
M
Depth is displayed as the latest scale selected in B/M-Mode.

Scroll functions are capable in M-Mode only with linear and convex probes.
To switch from B-Mode to M-Mode, you must first select B/M-Mode and
then M-Mode.

3-8 DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION 46-030370 REV 0


Illustration 3-4
M-Mode Only Display

NOTE: The SCALE key does not function in M-Mode only.

3-3-12 Sweep Speed


The SWEEP SPEED key is used to toggle between a high and low sweep
High Sweep speed. The high sweep speed is two seconds per page; the low sweep
Speed speed is four seconds per page. This sweep speed is applied to M-Mode
Low
display formats.

3-3-13 Multiple Image


Display
Use the MULTI IMAGE LEFT and RIGHT ARROW keys to display dual B-
Multi Image Mode images.

To change from a single-image to multi-image when a linear probe is used,


press the RIGHT ARROW key. When a convex probe is used, press LEFT
ARROW key to move the single image to left, then press the RIGHT
ARROW key to freeze the left image and then activate the right image.

When the LEFT ARROW key is pressed, the right image of the CRT is frozen
and the left side image is shown in real-time. When the RIGHT ARROW key
is pressed, the left image is frozen and the right side image is shown in real-
time. To freeze the last image, press the FREEZE key.

46-030370 REV 0 DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION 3-9


3-3-13 Multiple Image
Display
(continued) To change from multi-image display to single image display, press the
ERASE key twice or B-MODE key once. (This operation is possible whether
the image is frozen or active.)

NOTE: It is possible for some probes to display a third image. To do


this press the RIGHT ARROW key twice.

The following table (Table 3-2) shows the maximum number of images that
can be displayed. The number depends on the probe type and the scale
factor selected. Use the MULTI IMAGE keys to display more than a single
image on the screen. Two examples of multiple image displays are shown
in Illustrations 3-5 and 3-6.

Table 3-2
Maximum Number of Images
Scale Factor x0.7 x1 x1.5 x2

Probe A 3 3 3 2
Probe B 3 2 1 1
Probe C 2 1 1 1
Probe D 3 2 1 1
Probe E 3 2 1 1
Probe F 3 2 2 2
Probe G 3 3 2 1
Probe H 3 3 2 1
Probe R 2 2 2 2
Probe S 2 2 2 2

Probe CA 2 2 2 2
Probe CB 2 2 2 2
Probe CC 2 2 2 2
Probe CV 2 2 2 2
Probe LP 2 2 2 2

3-10 DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION 46-030370 REV 0


Illustration 3-5
Multiple Image Display
Convex CA
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
11 : 14 : 53
CA 5MHz
1.0

G63D54T60 G68D54T60
GE

Illustration 3-6
Multiple Image Display
Linear E
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
11 : 14 : 12
E 5MHz
0.7

G58D54T60 G60D54T60 G64D54T60


GE

46-030370 REV 0 DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION 3-11


3-3-14 Freeze Key
An image becomes frozen when the FREEZE key is pressed. The freeze
function is released when the key is pressed again.
Freeze

NOTE: Either ERASE, NEW PATIENT or B-MODE keys can also be


pressed to release freeze. Using these keys will erase patient
data, calculations and some scan parameters.

3-3-15 Body Pattern


Controls
Use the BODY PATTERN keys, ROTATION KNOB and TRACKBALL to
Body Pattern display body patterns, scan probe location and scan probe orientation.
Rotation L R
Press the L key to display the body pattern on the left side of a screen.
Use the L key when a single image display format is chosen.
Center Sel
Press the R key to display the body pattern on the right side of a screen.
(Multi-image format only).

Press the CENTER key to display the body pattern on the center of the
screen. (This key functions when three images are shown.)

NOTE: The probe mark can be moved when LED of either the L, R, or
CENTER keys is on.

The body pattern disappears if you press the L, R or CENTER


key whose LED is on.

Only the L key functions in B/M- and M-Modes.

The SEL key is used to select a body pattern from the package enabled. See
Illustrations on the following page.

To move and place the probe marker use the TRACKBALL.

Use the ROTATION KNOB to rotate the probe mark for orientation.

The rotation of the probe mark corresponds to that of the rotation knob.

The ROTATION KNOB stops every 30 degrees.

NOTE: The probe mark can be moved on the body pattern whose LED
is lighted.

3-12 DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION 46-030370 REV 0


3-3-15 Body Pattern
Controls
(continued) One of three body pattern packages can be selected for display by pressing
the CONTROL, J keys.

Refer to Section 5-10, which explains Control Key Functions (CONTROL,


J), for further details.

PACKAGE A
Abdominal Patterns

PACKAGE B
OB, GYN Patterns

PACKAGE C
Liver and Head Patterns

46-030370 REV 0 DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION 3-13


3-3-16 Comment Key
The COMMENT key is used to add characters, words, and notations in the
scan image area.
Comment
A flashing cursor appears when the COMMENT key is pressed. The starting
point of the cursor can be controlled by the TRACKBALL.

Use the alphanumeric keys to enter comments.

Press the RETURN key to start a new line.

Use the BACKSPACE key for correction.

Press the ENTER key to release the comment function.

Comments will be erased if you press the comment key a second time, the
NEW PATIENT, ERASE or MODE SELECT keys (measurements will be
erased at the same time).

3-3-17 Keyboard
Illumination
The KEY LIGHT key illuminates the keyboard in a dark room.
Key
Light Press this key to enable a soft green background illumination of the
keyboard to facilitate operation in a dark room.

Press this key a second time to disable the keyboard background


illumination.

3-3-18 Record Key


The RECORD key is used to permanently record the image on the display
monitor. It can be arranged to trigger a multi-image camera or video page
Record printer. This key is also used to transfer data to the DMC computer.

3-3-19 Ext Video Key


The EXT VIDEO key is used to view VCR playback video.
Ext
Video Press this key (LED light on) when playing a video tape on a VCR connected
to the RT 3200 Advantage - I.

Press this key a second time (LED light out) to view RT 3200 Advantage - I
images.

3-14 DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION 46-030370 REV 0


3-4 Measurement Keys

Measurement
DIST The DIST key is used to enable the cursors to make generic
Dist Trace Off linear distance measurements. It is used in conjunction
Area
with the TRACKBALL, SET and measure functions.
Set Meas
TRACE The TRACE/AREA key is used to enable the trace func-
AREA tion. It is used to trace an object to determine circumfer-
ence and/or area of the object. Used in conjunction with the
TRACKBALL, SET and measure functions.

OFF The OFF key is used to erase the measurement cursors,


trace and measured or calculated data.

SET The SET key is used to fix a measurement cursor and


enable the second of the pair.

MEAS The measure function is used to complete a measurement


sequence and display the results.

TRACKBALL In this functional group, the TRACKBALL is used to


manipulate the measurement cursors.

ERASE Press the ERASE key once and the system will give a
Erase warning beep.

Press this key a second time and the system will erase all
comments, measurements and calculations from the dis-
play screen. The image will also be unfrozen and return to
real-time scanning.

NOTE: Body Patterns will not be erased; they must be turned off with
the CONTROL, J function.

46-030370 REV 01 DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION 3-15


3-5 Function Keys

Function
OB TBL 1 Displays the factory preset OB Table selections (BPD,
OB OB CRL, FL, AC and HC).
Tbl 1 Tbl 2

OB TBL 2 Displays the user programmable OB Table selection 1


Calc 1 Calc 2
through 5. 1 through 3 are for linear measurements and 4
and 5 are for area/circumference measurements.
Calc 3 Map
CALC 1 Displays the calculation menu for circumference, volume,
heart rate, velocity and A/B Ratio.

CALC 2 Displays the calculation menu for Estimated Date of Con-


finement, Estimated Fetal Body Weight and Amniotic Fluid
Index.

CALC 3 This key is not functional for the RT 3200 Advantage - I.

MAP Displays the menu to select the five available gray scale
mapping curves for the selected map package.

The CONTROL, N function toggles between MAP package


A and B.

These menu selection arrows allow the left/right movement


between the menu option available at the bottom of the


display.

3-6 Single Keystroke


Operation
Displaying the biopsy guidelines previously required the use of the CON-
TROL key function.

Whenever the system is not accepting alphanumeric input from the key-
board (i.e. Control function, Comment key function, ID/Name function,
CALC 1 or EDC modes), a single keystroke shall perform the following
function:

Keystroke Function performed

L Toggle biopsy guidelines on/off


L

3-16 DETAILED CONTROL DESCRIPTION 46-030370 REV 0


1
SECTION 4

GENERIC MEASUREMENTS

Overview

Distance Measurement

Circumference Measurement

Area Measurement

Measurement Calculation Error Messages

46-030370 REV 0 GENERIC MEASUREMENTS 4-1


This page intentionally left blank.

4-2 GENERIC MEASUREMENTS 46-030370 REV 0


SECTION 4
GENERIC MEASUREMENTS

4-1 Overview
Five measurement keys and the TRACKBALL are used to measure
distance, circumference and volume with four kinds of cursor calipers.

Only the distance measurement is available in B-, B/M- and M-Modes.

Illustration 4-1
Measurement Display

GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
11 : 18 : 57
CH 5MHz
1.0
D+ 46
X 48
X 41
X 45

G66D54T60 G66D54T60
GE

NOTE: Distance measurements are displayed in mm and area


measurements are displayed in square cm. These designations
are not displayed on the monitor.

All measurement data will be erased when MODE, SCALE, and PROBE are
changed. Only four measurements are possible for each type of measure-
ment. If more than four measurements are attempted, the system stops
functioning and will beep.

If more than four measurements are necessary, press the OFF key to erase
the previous measurements.

46-030370 REV 0 GENERIC MEASUREMENTS 4-3


4-2 Distance Measurement
Press DIST, SET, MEAS, and use the TRACKBALL to measure the
distance between two locations.

By using four cursor patterns, four distance measurements can be made on


one display.

Press the DIST key. LED goes on and the "+" cursor is displayed.

Dist


Use the TRACKBALL to move the cursor to the measurement starting point.
T. B.

▼ Press the SET key. The initial measurement point will be locked (set) and
the measurement end point cursor appears.
Set

▼ Use the TRACKBALL to move the end point "+" cursor to the opposite end
of the measurement. (A dotted line with 10 mm interval connects two points
T. B. and measured value will appear on the left side of the CRT in mm.)

▼ Press the MEAS key. The second cursor is locked and the measurement
values are displayed.
Meas

▼ Press the OFF key to erase the cursor, dotted line, and measured values.

Off

NOTE: If the DIST key is pressed in the middle of the measurement, the
cursor and measure values will be cleared (LED will go out). To
complete a measurement, repeat the preceding procedure.

By repeating the preceding procedure, up to four measurements


are possible on the same image.

4-4 GENERIC MEASUREMENTS 46-030370 REV 0


Illustration 4-2
Single Distance
Measurement
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
11 : 20 : 22
CA 5MHz
1.0
D+ 61
X
X
X

G70D54T60
GE

Illustration 4-3
Multiple Distance
Measurements
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
11 : 21 : 17
CA 5MHz
1.0
D+ 61
X 76
X
X

G70D54T60
GE

46-030370 REV 0 GENERIC MEASUREMENTS 4-5


4-3 Circumference
Measurement
To measure a circumference, use TRACE/AREA, SET, MEAS, and the
TRACKBALL.

By using four cursor patterns, four circumference measurements can be


made on one display.

Press the TRACE/AREA key. The LED goes on and the "+" is displayed.

Trace
Area


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
T. B. point.


Press the SET key. The starting point cursor is locked and the "+" cursor
Set changes to a dot cursor.


Use the TRACKBALL to move the dot cursor, tracing the object to be
T. B. measured. The trace is displayed as a continuous curve and the measured
value in mm is displayed on the left side of the screen.


When the tracing is complete, press the MEAS key. The cursor is locked and
Meas measured values are fixed.

Press the OFF key to erase the cursor, trace, and the measured values.
Off

NOTE: If the TRACE/AREA key is pressed in the middle of the


measurement, the cursor and measured values will be cleared
(LED will go out). To complete a measurement, repeat the
preceding procedure.

By repeating the preceding procedure, up to four measurements


for circumference and area are possible on the same screen.

4-6 GENERIC MEASUREMENTS 46-030370 REV 0


Illustration 4-4
Single Circumference
Measurement
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
12 : 05 : 58
CA 5MHz
1.0

C+ 139
X
X
X
A+
X
X
X

G70D54T60
GE

Illustration 4-5
Multiple Circumference
Measurements
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
12 : 04 : 34
CH 5MHz
1.0

C+ 133
X 179
X
X
A+
X
X
X

G70D54T60 G70D54T60
GE

46-030370 REV 0 GENERIC MEASUREMENTS 4-7


4-4 Area Measurement
Use TRACE/AREA, SET, MEAS and the TRACKBALL to mark area
measurements.

By using the four different cursor patterns, four area measurements can be
made on one display.

Press the TRACE/AREA key. The LED lights and the "+" cursor appear on

Trace
Area the display.


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the first measurement point.
T. B.

▼ Press the SET key. The starting point "+" cursor is locked and changes to
a dot cursor.
Set

▼ Use the TRACKBALL and the dot cursor to trace the object to be measured.
The trace is displayed as a continuous curve, with the circumference
T. B. continuously updated as you move the TRACKBALL.

▼ Press SET. The circumference measurement is locked. The "+" cursor


appears again.
Set

▼ Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor inside the traced area.

T. B.

▼ Press MEAS. The cursor is locked and area is measured by a graphical


method. The measured value is displayed in square cm.
Meas

Press OFF to erase all the display of the cursor, trace, and measured data.
Off

NOTE: If TRACE/AREA key is pressed in the middle of the


measurement, the cursor and measured values will be cleared
(LED will go out). To complete a measurement, repeat the
preceding procedure.

By repeating the preceding procedure, up to four measurements


for circumference and area are possible on the same screen.

4-8 GENERIC MEASUREMENTS 46-030370 REV 0


Illustration 4-6
Single Area Measurement
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
12 : 07 : 48
CA 5MHz
1.0

C+ 129
X
X
X
A+ 12.03
X
X
X

G70D54T60
GE

Illustration 4-7
Multiple Area Measurements
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
12 : 09 : 08
CH 5MHz
1.0

C+ 57
X 96
X
X
A+ 2.38
X 6.65
X
X

G70D54T60 G70D54T60
GE

46-030370 REV 0 GENERIC MEASUREMENTS 4-9


4-5 Measurement Calculation
Error Messages

Table 4-1
Measurement Calculation Error
Messages

Error Display Error Explanation

ILG Illegal: Wrong Mode selected


(i.e. "VEL" in B-Mode)

N.M. No Measure: Calculation was attempted


(No Msr.) before all measurement
steps were made.

ERR Error: The denominator was "0".


This method for area
measurement was wrong.

O.O.R. Out of Range: The calculation is out of


(Over Flow) range. The measured value
is too large or too small.

N.A. No Answer: No result found in the


tables.

4-10 GENERIC MEASUREMENTS 46-030370 REV 0


SECTION 5

CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS

B-Mode Presetting

Clock Readjustment

Text/Graphics Display On/Off

Echo Level

Histogram

Film Development Time

Gestational Data

Hospital Name

Inverse

Body Pattern Package

High Frame Rate On/Off

Biopsy Guideline

Map Package

Dotted Line On/Off

Record Output (Gamma Curve Selection)

Frame Averaging On/Off

46-030370 REV 0 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 5-1


This page intentionally left blank.

5-2 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


SECTION 5
CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS

This section describes how to use the CONTROL key to perform the following functions:

• B-Mode parameter presets (CONTROL, B) • Enter hospital name (CONTROL, H)


• Set system date (CONTROL, C, D) • Display or record inverse images
• Set system time (CONTROL, C, T) (CONTROL, I, 1-2-3-4)
• Text and graphics display on/off (CONTROL, D) • Select body pattern package
• Echo level measurements— (CONTROL, J, 1-2-3)
fixed area (CONTROL, E, 1-2-3) • High frame rate on/off (CONTROL, K)
arbitrary area (CONTROL, E, 0) • Display biopsy guidelines (CONTROL, L, 1)
• Display an echo level histogram— • Select gray scale map packages (CONTROL, N)
fixed area (CONTROL, E, H, 1-2-3) • Display dotted line between cursors
arbitrary area (CONTROL, E, H, 0) (CONTROL, Q)
• Film development time (CONTROL, F, 1-2-3-4) • Select gamma curve for video output
• Input user programmable GA tables (CONTROL, R, P-V)
(CONTROL, G, 0) • Enable/disable frame averaging (CONTROL, W)
• Correct user programmable GA tables
(CONTROL, G, 1-2-3-4-5)

Illustration 5-1
Control Function Key
Control

New ID Ext Key 1


Patient Name Comment Erase Preset Video Light Probe
2

Function
( ) ? ! " = ~ + %
OB OB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - BS Tbl 1 Tbl 2

Q W E R T Y U I O P Calc 1 Calc 2

A S D F G H J K L Return Map

Shift Z X C V B N M . / Shift

Space Space Control Enter

Mode
Image Direction Body Pattern Measurement High Sweep
B B/M M Speed
Low
Rvs Inv Rotation L R Dist Trace Off
Area
Focus

Center Sel Set Meas 1 2 3 4 Comb

- TGC + Scale
cm Depth

0 x0.7 x2.0
Dynamic Range x1.0 x1.5
20cm 15cm 10cm 7.5cm
2.5

5 Scroll

7.5 Record
Gain
10

12.5
Multi Image
15
Freeze
17.5

46-030370 REV 0 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 5-3


5-1 B-Mode Presetting
Control B

CONTROL, B will allow you to preset scan parameters for each probe in B-
and B/M-Modes. When you press PRESET, NEW PATIENT, change the
PROBE or power on/off, the system will return to the preset state. Param-
eters that can be preset are:

• GAIN • IMAGE INVERT

• DYNAMIC RANGE • SCALE

• FOCUS • MAP/WINDOW

• IMAGE REVERSE

DISPLAY

CONTROL : ___
Control


CONTROL : B___
B B-MODE PRESETTING

Adjust the presets while scanning.


Gain, Dynamic Range, Mapping, Focus, Scale, Image Reverse and Image
Invert may be adjusted.


CONTROL : ___
Enter
When the ENTER key is pressed, the values of Gain, Dynamic Range,
Focus, Scale, Map, Image Reverse and Image Invert will then be saved as
preset values. When the NEW PATIENT, PRESET and PROBE keys are
pressed or when the power switch is turned on, the system will be set to the
B-Mode preset values saved for the selected probe.

NOTE: This function is effective only for the probe type currently
selected

5-4 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


5-2 Clock Readjustment
Control C D

To set the DATE :

DISPLAY

CONTROL : ___
Control


CONTROL : ___
C CLOCK READJUSTMENT


CONTROL : CD
D CLOCK READJUSTMENT / DATE (MM/DD/YY)


CONTROL : CD
Enter CLOCK READJUSTMENT / DATE (MM/DD/YY)
Press ENTER to set the internal clock for month/day/year

Input CONTROL : CD
Month/Day/Year CLOCK READJUSTMENT / DATE (MMDDYY) = 07/27/91
6 digits After pressing ENTER, use the numeric keys to input the date data.


CONTROL : ___
Enter

Data for the date is set when the ENTER key is pressed the second time.

NOTE: Slashes are required in the input string. If the date or month
is a single digit, it must include a zero to fill out the two-
character field.

46-030370 REV 0 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 5-5


5-2 Clock Readjustment
(continued)
Control C T

To set the clock TIME :

DISPLAY

CONTROL : ___
Control


CONTROL : C__
C CLOCK READJUSTMENT


CONTROL : CT
T CLOCK READJUSTMENT / TIME (HM)


CONTROL : CT
Enter CLOCK READJUSTMENT / TIME (HM) =
Press ENTER to set the clock time (24 hour run)


CONTROL : CT
Hour/Min Input
CLOCK READJUSTMENT : TIME (HM) = 1422
4 digits
After pressing ENTER, use the numeric keys to input the time data.


CONTROL : ___
Enter Time data is set when the ENTER key is pressed the second time.

5-6 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


5-3 Text/Graphics Display
On/Off
This CONTROL key causes the text/graphics display to be turned on/off on
the monitor, the image and gray scale pattern will remain.

Control D

To turn the text/graphics display ON or OFF :

DISPLAY

CONTROL : ___
Control


CONTROL : D___
D GRAPHICS ON/OFF


CONTROL : ___
Enter

This operation erases the display except for the image and gray scale
pattern. Text/graphics will not be erased until the ENTER key is pressed.

To turn on text/graphics display:

CONTROL : ___
Control


CONTROL : D___
D GRAPHICS ON/OFF


CONTROL : ___
Enter
If the text/graphics have been turned off, no screen display will be present
when the CONTROL and D keys are pressed.

Text/graphics will be displayed when the ENTER key is pressed.

46-030370 REV 0 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 5-7


5-4 Echo Level

5-4-1 Echo Level


Measurement (
Control E 1 2 3
(fixed area)

It is possible to measure echo level of a fixed area (box-shaped cursor).


This function is available only when the image is frozen. Measured values
are displayed near the cursor. The average gray level of the total pixels in
the cursor will be displayed in terms of a number ranging from 0 to 255. (See
Illustration 5-2). Echo level can be measured more than once in each image
display.

Selection of fixed area


1 = 3mm square 2 = 6mm square 3 = 12mm square

DISPLAY

CONTROL: ___
Control


CONTROL : E1 ___
E ECHO LEVEL


( CONTROL : E1
1 2 3 ECHO LEVEL /3mm


Press the ENTER key to lock the cursor. A box shaped cursor appears on
Enter
the screen. Move the cursor with the TRACKBALL.


For the case of E1, a 3mm x 3mm box appears, whose movement is
T.B. controlled by the TRACKBALL. Move the cursor to the area where mea-
surement is needed.


Then, pressing MEAS the cursor is locked and the average echo level will
Meas be displayed to the left of the cursor.

Press OFF to erase all echo level measurements


Off

NOTE: This function works only when the image is frozen.

5-8 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


5-4-2 Echo Level
+
Measurement
Control E 0
(arbitrary area)
Echo amplitude level can be measured in an arbitrary area. (See Illustration
5-3).
DISPLAY

CONTROL : ___
Control


CONTROL : E ___
E ECHO LEVEL


+ CONTROL : E0
0 ECHO LEVEL /FREE


CONTROL : E0
Enter ECHO LEVEL/FREE
The "+" cursor appears.


“+” cursor is moved to the measurement starting point.
T.B.


“+” cursor is changed into a dot cursor.
Set


Trace the circumference of the area with a dot cursor. The trace is displayed
T.B. by a curve made of a continuum of dots. The length of the circumference is
measured and the value is shown. The unit is in mm; however, mm does not
appear on the screen.

NOTE: Make sure to complete the trace by connecting it to the starting


▼ point.

Set “+” cursor reappears.


T.B.
IMPORTANT: With the TRACKBALL, move the "+" cursor inside the traced
area.

Meas
Press the MEAS key to display the average echo level in the traced area The
measured value is displayed near the traced area. The circumference and
area are also measured.

Off
To erase the display, press the OFF key.

NOTE: This function works only when the image is frozen.

46-030370 REV 0 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 5-9


Illustration 5-2
Echo Level Measurement
(fixed area 5-4-1)

Illustration 5-3
Echo Level Measurement
(arbitrary area 5-4-2)

5-10 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


Illustration 5-4
Histogram
(fixed area 5-5-1)

Illustration 5-5
Histogram
(arbitrary area 5-5-2)

46-030370 REV 0 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 5-11


5-5 Histogram

5-5-1 Histogram (fixed


area) (
Control E H 1 2 3

An echo distribution for a fixed area is displayed using a histogram. (See


Illustration 5-4).

DISPLAY

CONTROL : ___
Control


CONTROL : E ___
E ECHO LEVEL


CONTROL : EH ___
H ECHO LEVEL/HISTOGRAM


( CONTROL : EH1
1 2 3 ECHO LEVEL/HISTOGRAM/3mm
For EHl, a 3mm x 3mm box cursor appears.
For EH2, a 6mm x 6mm box cursor appears.
For EH3, a 12mm x 12mm box cursor appears.


Press ENTER to lock in cursor choice.
Enter


Move the cursor with the TRACKBALL to the area to be measured.
T.B.


Press the MEAS and the cursor is locked and an echo histogram is
Meas displayed.

The histogram is shown in the upper right of the image area.


The measured values will be displayed in the form of Mean (average gray
level inside the cursor: 0-255) and Mode (maximum gray level: 0-255 and
percentage: %).

Off Press the OFF key to erase the display.

NOTE: This function works only when an image is frozen.

5-12 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


5-5-2 Histogram (an
arbitrary area) +
Control E H 0

The echo distribution for an arbitrary area can be displayed as a histogram.


(See Illustration 5-5).

DISPLAY
CONTROL : E ___
Control


CONTROL : E ___
E ECHO LEVEL


CONTROL : EH ___
H ECHO LEVEL/HISTOGRAM


+ CONTROL : EH0 ___
0 ECHO LEVEL/HISTOGRAM/FREE


CONTROL : EH0 ___
Enter ECHO LEVEL/HISTOGRAM/FREE


The "+" cursor appears on the screen. Move the cursor to the location where
T.B. measurement is needed using the TRACKBALL.


Press SET, the "+" cursor changes to a dot cursor.
Set


Trace the circumference of the area with the dot cursor. The trace is
T.B. displayed by a curve made of continuous dots. The length of the circumfer-
ence is measured and the value shown. The length is in mm, however, mm
does not appear on the screen.

NOTE: Be sure to complete the trace by connecting it to the starting


point.

Set
Press SET and the "+" cursor reappears.


(continued)

46-030370 REV 0 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 5-13


5-5-2 Histogram (an
arbitrary area)
(continued)


IMPORTANT: With the TRACKBALL move the "+" cursor inside the
T.B. traced area.


Press MEAS, an echo level of the traced area is displayed in histogram. H
Meas
is shown near the area. Histogram is shown in the upper right of the image
area. Measured values will be displayed in the forms of Mean (average
number of the pixels of gray level inside the cursor: 0-255) and Mode
(maximum gray level: 0-255 and percentage.

Press the OFF key to erase the display.


Off

NOTE: This function works only when the image is frozen.

5-14 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


5-6 Film Development
Time
Sets an internal system audio beep alarm for Polaroid film development
timing.

( )
Control F 1 2 3 4

This is used to sound a two beep audio signal which indicates the completion
of the development of Polaroid film.

If more than one picture is recorded within a set-up time, only the first one
will be effectively timed.

DISPLAY

CONTROL : ___
Control


CONTROL : F ___
F DEVELOPMENT TIME

CONTROL : F1 ___

1 DEVELOPMENT TIME : OFF


The alarm does not sound for the development time.

CONTROL : F2 ___

2 DEVELOPMENT : 30 SEC
The alarm sounds 30 seconds after the RECORD key is pressed.

( CONTROL : F3 ___

3 DEVELOPMENT TIME : 45 SEC


The alarm sounds 45 seconds after the RECORD key is pressed.

) CONTROL : F4 ___

4 DEVELOPMENT TIME : 60 SEC


The alarm sounds 60 seconds after the RECORD key is pressed.


Press the ENTER key to set the Polaroid film development time alarm.
Enter This setting will be saved and stored after the power is turned off.

NOTE: This function works only when CONTROL, R, P is selected.

46-030370 REV 0 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 5-15


5-7 Gestational Data

5-7-1 Programming
Gestational Age +

Data
Control G 0

This Control key function is used to allow user gestational age data to be
inputted into OB TBL 2.

The user may input up to 5 different tables for selection by OB TBL 2. Tables
1 through 3 correspond to distance measurements. Tables 4 and 5
correspond to circumference measurements.

DISPLAY

CONTROL : ___
Control


CONTROL : G ___
G GESTATIONAL DATA


+ CONTROL : G0 ___
0 GESTATIONAL DATA/ INPUT


CONTROL : G0
Enter MENU LEVEL = ___
Press the ENTER key.


1-5
( ) ? CONTROL : G0
1 2 3 4 5 MENU LEVEL = 1/TITLE = ___
Select one of the five available user OB Tables in which you want to input
data.

NOTE: If error is made in MENU LEVEL, press BS (backspace) key to


erase your selection and re-enter the table number.

Input Title
CONTROL : G0
6 char. max.
MENU LEVEL = 1/TITLE = BPD___
(BPD = BIPARIETAL DIAMETER:
▼ Input the title (6 characters) of your menu selection.
Return
CONTROL : G0
MENU LEVEL : 1/TITLE = BPD/
▼ MIN. = ___mm
Press RETURN then enter the minimum measurement value (3 digits),
(continued) i.e. 20mm = 020mm.

5-16 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


5-7-1 Programming
Gestational Age
Data (continued)


Input CONTROL : G0
Minimal MENU LEVEL = 1/TITLE = BPD/MIN. = 020mm
Value


CONTROL : G0
Return (01)020mm : __WD ± /MENU LEVEL = 1 (BPD)
At this stage, the list of measurements is shown on the monitor.


Enter Weeks CONTROL : G0
(01)020mm : 12W ___D ± /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Enter the weeks as a 2 digit number.

CONTROL : G0

Enter Days
(01)020mm : 12W1D ± ___ /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Enter the days as a 1 digit number.

Enter standard
CONTROL : G0
deviation:
weeks, days (01)020mm : 12W1D ± 06 ___ /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
or x Enter the standard deviation as a 2 digit number. Enter "x" if no standard
deviation is needed.


CONTROL : G0
Return (02)021mm : ___ WD ± /MENULEVEL = 1(BPD)
Press RETURN. Repeat the above steps to enter the remaining values for
the weeks, days and standard deviation in the chart selected.


CONTROL : ___
Enter
When all the menu entries are completed, press ENTER to store the table
in the system memory.

NOTE: When the 96th data entry is put in, the system beeps and
shows a "FILL!" annotation. If this happens, stop entering
data and press the ENTER key.

46-030370 REV 0 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 5-17


5-7-2 Editing
Gestational Age ( ) ?

Data
Control G 1 2 3 4 5

To correct errors in user programmable tables.

Illustration 5-6
User Programmable OB Tables
GENERAL
ELECTRIC 020mm : 12W1D:06 044mm: 068mm: 092mm:
06/20/91 021mm : 12W4D:06 045mm: 069mm: 093mm:
12 : 17 : 00 022mm : 12W3D:06 046mm: 070mm: 094mm:
CA 5MHz 023mm : 13W1D:06 047mm: 071mm: 095mm:
1.0 024mm : 13W2D:06 048mm: 072mm: 096mm:
025mm : 13W4D:06 049mm: 073mm: 097mm:
026mm : 13W6D:06 050mm: 074mm: 098mm:
027mm : 14W1D:06 051mm: 075mm: 099mm:
028mm : 14W4D:06 052mm: 076mm: 100mm:
029mm : 14W5D:06 053mm: 077mm: 101mm:
030mm : 15W0D:06 054mm: 078mm: 102mm:
031mm : 15W2D:06 055mm: 079mm: 103mm:
032mm : 15W4D:06 056mm: 080mm: 104mm:
033mm : 15W6D:06 057mm: 081mm: 105mm:
034mm : 16W1D:06 058mm: 082mm: 106mm:
035mm: 059mm: 083mm: 107mm:
036mm: 060mm: 084mm: 108mm:
037mm: 061mm: 085mm: 109mm:
038mm: 062mm: 086mm: 110mm:
039mm: 063mm: 087mm: 111mm:
040mm: 064mm: 088mm: 112mm:
041mm: 065mm: 089mm: 113mm:
042mm: 066mm: 090mm: 114mm:
043mm: 067mm: 091mm: 115mm:
G68D54T60
CONTROL : G1 (03) 022mm : 12W6D:06_/ MENU LEVEL = 1 (BPD )

DISPLAY

CONTROL : ___
Control


CONTROL : G ___
G GESTATIONAL DATA/


1-5
1-5
( ) ? CONTROL : G1 ___
1 2 3 4 5 GESTATIONAL DATA/LIST-EDITOR
Select the list from OB TBL 2 to be revised ( 1-5 ).


CONTROL : G1
Enter
_mm : WD ± /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Press the ENTER key. At this time the list will be displayed on the monitor.


CONTROL : G1
Enter the
distance ( ) 020mm : WD ± /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD).
value to be Enter the measurement value you wish to revise.
revised


(continued)

5-18 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


5-7-2 Editing
Gestational Age
Data (continued)


CONTROL : G1
Return (02)021mm : ___ WD ±/MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Press RETURN. The measurement value you want to revise is highlighted
on the list.


CONTROL : G1
Enter Weeks (02)011 mm : 12W ___D ± /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Enter the new value for weeks. Data should be in 2 digits.


CONTROL : G1
Enter Days (02)011mm : 12W4D ± ___ /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Enter the new value for days as one digit. A value of 7 or less.


CONTROL : G1
Enter standard (02)011mm : 12W4D ± 06 ___/MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
deviation, Enter the new value for standard deviation as two digits. "x" can be used if
weeks, days or x
no standard deviation is needed.


CONTROL : G1
Return ( ) ___mm : W D ± /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)


CONTROL : ___
Enter
Press ENTER when all corrections have been completed.

46-030370 REV 0 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 5-19


5-8 Hospital Name

Control H

Use the Control function to enter the name of the hospital and department.
They should be entered within two lines (8 characters maximum per line).

DISPLAY

CONTROL : ___
Control


CONTROL : H ___
H HOSPITAL NAME


CONTROL : H ___
Enter HOSPITAL NAME = ___


CONTROL : H
Enter Hospital
HOSPITAL NAME = General/Electric
Name
8 char/
2 lines


CONTROL : ___
Enter Press ENTER to display and store the hospital name information.

The hospital name will be shown on the upper left corner of the screen.
This information will be retained even after the power is turned off.

5-20 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


5-9 Inverse
( )
Control I 1 2 3 4

This Control function selects the combination of white on black (W/B) or


black on white (B/W) formats that will be displayed on the monitor or
recorded by the peripherals when the RECORD key is pressed.

DISPLAY

CONTROL : ___
Control


CONTROL : I ___
I INVERSE:


CONTROL : I 1

1 INVERSE : DISPLAY W/B RECORD W/B


Both display and record are positive.

CONTROL : I 2 ___

2 INVERSE : DISPLAY W/B RECORD B/W


Display is negative and record is positive

( CONTROL : I 3 ___

3 INVERSE : DISPLAY B/W RECORD B/W


Both display and record are negative.

) CONTROL : I 4 ___

4 INVERSE : DISPLAY B/W RECORD W/B


Display is negative and record is positive.


CONTROL : ___
Enter

NOTE: When the RECORD key is pressed the display will momentarily
show the image that is being recorded. This setting is retained
even after power is turned off.

46-030370 REV 0 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 5-21


5-10 Body Pattern Package
(
Control J 1 2 3

This Control function is used to select the body marker package that will be
displayed when using the BODY PATTERN keys.

DISPLAY

CONTROL : ___
Control


CONTROL : J ___
J BODY PATTERN PACKAGE


CONTROL : J1 ___
1 BODY PATTERN PACKAGE/A (Abdominal Patterns)


CONTROL : J2 ___
2 BODY PATTERN PACKAGE/B (OB, GYN Patterns)


( CONTROL : J3 ___
3 BODY PATTERN PACKAGE/C (Liver and Head Patterns)


CONTROL : ___
Enter Press the ENTER key after selecting 1(A), 2(B) or 3(C).

5-22 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


Illustration 5-7
Body Marker Patterns

PACKAGE A
Abdominal Patterns

PACKAGE B
OB/GYN Patterns

PACKAGE C
Liver and Head Patterns

The body marker package selection will be retained after power is turned off.

46-030370 REV 0 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 5-23


5-11 High Frame Rate On/Off

Control K

This Control function is used to enable or disable the "High Frame Rate"
option. The frame rate will double if "High Frame Rate" is turned ON.

DISPLAY

CONTROL :
Control Press the CONTROL key


CONTROL : K __
K HIGH FRAME RATE ON
Press the "K" key to toggle the frame rate function.


CONTROL :
Enter Press ENTER to select your Control K function request

HFR will be displayed in the lower left hand corner of the screen when
high frame rate is selected.

When HFR is selected the frame rate will become twice the usual rate.

Press CONTROL, K, ENTER again to toggle the High Frame Rate function
OFF.

NOTE: This function works only when a linear probe is being used.

5-24 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


5-12 Biopsy Guideline

Control L 1

This Control function is used to display the biopsy guideline as a dotted line.
The type of guidelines varies depending on the probe type. This function
works only in B-Mode.

Press the OFF key under Measurement to erase the biopsy guideline
display.

Whenever the system is not accepting alphanumeric input from the key-
board (i.e. Control function, Comment key function, ID/Name function,
CALC 1 EDD or CALC 3 IVF modes), simply press L to turn on the Biopsy
Guidelines. Press L a second time to turn off the Biopsy Guidelines.

DISPLAY

Control CONTROL : ___


L CONTROL : L ___
BIOPSY GUIDELINE


1 CONTROL : L 1___
BIOPSY GUIDELINE


Enter Press the ENTER key and the guidelines appear.

46-030370 REV 02
3 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 5-25
5-12 Biopsy Guideline
(continued)

Probe
Type Guideline Display

ATF/ATV Displays a single line along the needle path.

CA/CB* For MAGGI™ (older style) guides:


Displays 3 lines simultaneously. They cross the center line
at 40mm, 60mm & 80mm, respectively.

For Ultra Pro™ (current style) guides (see note):


Two diverging dotted lines to define the path. The middle
of the path crosses the center line at a depth of 70 mm.

CK (CF) Displays 3 dotted lines that represent the 3 angles available


from the stainless steel reuseable guide.

CTV* 26.5°
The line crosses the center line at 26 mm deep.

D Biopsy zone

F 30°

R* Displays a single line along needle path.

H** Displays a single line along needle path.

LP Two diverging dotted lines to define the path. The middle


of the path crosses the center line at a depth of 20 mm.

MZ Displays a single line along needle path.

RA Displays Needle Placement Grid.


Pressing CONTROL, L, 1 a second time removes the grid.

* Biopsy Guide attachment required.


** Biopsy Guide attachment is not available for H probe.

NOTE: The type of biopsy guideline displayed for the CA/CB probe is
service selectable by a switch (SW5) on the Master Controller
circuit board (MST board). Contact your GE service represen-
tative for the proper display.

5-26 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 46-030370 REV 02


3
Illustration 5-8
ATF/ATV Probe Biopsy Guideline

12 / 03 / 92
08 : 59 : 27
ATV 5MHz
x1.0

G50D54T30 GE

Illustration 5-9
CTV Probe Guideline

GE
Medical 5.4mm
04 / 15 / 91
10 : 59 : 45
CTV 5MHz
1.0
26.5°
26.5°

26mm

G46D66T50
CONTROL:__

2
46-030370 REV 0
1 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 5-27
Illustration 5-10
CA/CB Probe Guideline
Ultra Pro™ Guides
GE
Medical
06 / 09 / 93
10 : 59 : 45
CB3.5MHz
1.0

G46D54T60

Illustration 5-11
CA/CB Probe Guideline
MAGGI™ Guides
GE
Medical
04 / 15 / 91
10 : 59 : 45
CA 5MHz
1.0
5.4mm

40mm

60mm

80mm

G46D66T100
CONTROL:__

NOTE: The type of biopsy guideline displayed for the CA/CB probe is
service selectable by a switch (SW5) on the Master Controller
circuit board (MST board). Contact your GE service represen-
tative for the proper display.

5-28 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 46-030370 REV 01


5-12 Biopsy Guideline
(continued)

Illustration 5-12
D Probe Guideline

GE
Medical
04 / 15 / 91
10 : 59 : 45
D 3.5MHz
1.0

15°

G46D66T100
CONTROL:__

Illustration 5-13
F Probe Guideline

GE
Medical
04 / 15 / 91
10 : 59 : 45
F 5MHz 30° 30°
1.0

G46D66T100
CONTROL:__

46-030370 REV 0 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 5-29


5-12 Biopsy Guideline
(continued)

Illustration 5-14
H Probe Guideline

GE
Medical
12 / 10 / 92
11 : 14 : 12
H 7.5MHz
2.0

D+
x
x
x
C+
x
x
x
A+
x
x
x

ID:
1234

NAME:
SMITH
JOHN G66D54T27
CONTROL: GE

Illustration 5-15
LP Probe Guideline

GE
Medical
06 / 09 / 93
10 : 59 : 45
LP7.5MHz
1.5

G37D54T27

5-30 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


5-12 Biopsy Guideline
(continued)

Illustration 5-16
MZ Probe Guideline
Image Direction "RVS" is
Selected (on)
GE
Medical
06 / 20 / 92
12 : 28 : 59
MF6.5MHz
x1.0

D+
x
x
x
C+
x
x
x
A+
x
x
x

ID:
1234

NAME:
SMITH
JOHN G46D66T50 GE

Probe Type is displayed as MF on screen (not MZ)

Illustration 5-17
R Probe Guideline
Image Direction "RVS" is
Selected (on)
GE
Medical
06 / 20 / 92
12 : 28 : 59
R 7MHz
x1.0

D+
x
x
x
C+
x
x
x
A+
x
x
x

ID:
1234

NAME:
SMITH
JOHN G46D66T50 GE

46-030370 REV 023 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 5-31


5-12 Biopsy Guideline
(continued)

Illustration 5-18
RA Probe
Needle Placement Grid
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
11/ 05 / 92
09 : 40 : 23
RA 7MHz 12 + . + . + . + . + . + . +
x2.0
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 + . + . + . + . + . + . +
9 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 + . + . + . + . + . + . +
7 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 + . + . + . + . + . + . +
5 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 + . + . + . + . + . + . +
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 + . + . + . + . + . + . +
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0 + . + . + . + . + . + . +
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
G35D48T40
GE

Illustration 5-19
CK Probe Guideline

GE
Medical
04 / 15 / 91
10 : 59 : 45
CF3.5MHz
1.0

G46D66T100
CONTROL:__

Probe Type is displayed as CF on screen, not CK.

5-32 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 46-030370 REV 2


0
3
5-13 Map Package

Control N

This Control function is used to select the gray level mapping package menu
that will be displayed when the MAP key is pressed. The operator can
choose between Map Package A or B.

DISPLAY

CONTROL : ___
Control


CONTROL : N ___
N MAP PACKAGE B


CONTROL : ___
Enter

NOTE: The system will toggle between map package A and map
package B each time CONTROL, N, ENTER is pressed.

5-14 Dotted Line On/Off


Control Q

It is possible to erase the dotted line between two measurement cursors


when a distance measurement is taken.

DISPLAY

CONTROL : ___
Control


CONTROL : Q___
Q DOTTED LINE ON/OFF


Press the ENTER key.
Enter

Each time CONTROL, Q, ENTER is pressed the dotted line displayed


between two cursors will toggle on/off or off/on

46-030370 REV 02 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 5-33


5-15 Record Output (Gamma
Curve Selection)

Control R P V

This Control function will select if a gamma correction curve is used to modify
the output video when the RECORD key is pressed. CONTROL, R, P
selects a gamma curve for Polaroid imaging. CONTROL, R, V disables the
gamma correction curve for video printer recording.

DISPLAY

CONTROL : ___
Control


CONTROL : R ___
R RECORD OUTPUT

CONTROL : RP ___

P RECORD OUTPUT/SELECT
POLAROID
(Gamma correction curve will be used when the RECORD key is pressed.
System beeps after record process has started.)

CONTROL : RV ___

V RECORD OUTPUT/SELECT
VIDEO PRINTER
(Gamma correction curve will not be used when the RECORD key is
pressed. System beeps after record process has started.)


Press the ENTER key.
Enter

* CONTROL, F will function when CONTROL, R, P is selected.

5-34 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 46-030370 REV 02


5-16 Frame Averaging On/Off
Control W

This Control function will enable or disable the frame averaging function.

DISPLAY

CONTROL : ___
Control


CONTROL : W
W FRAME AVERAGING ON/OFF


Press the ENTER key
Enter

Each time you press CONTROL, W, ENTER you will toggle the frame
averaging function on/off or off/on.

The image will appear grainy with a faster frame rate while frame averaging
is off.

The image will appear smoother with a slower frame rate while frame
averaging is on.

NOTE: A selection of frame averaging function will be performed on


the image (linear or convex) which is displayed on the screen
at the time of operation.

46-030370 REV 02 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 5-35


This page intentionally left blank.

5-36 CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS 46-030370 REV 02


SECTION 6

FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS

OB Table 1

OB Table 2

Calc 1

Calc 2

Mapping

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-1


This page intentionally left blank.

6-2 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


SECTION 6
FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS

Illustration 6-1
Function Key Selections Function
OB OB
Tbl 1 Tbl 2

Calc 1 Calc 2

Calc 3 Map

New ID Ext Key 1


Patient Name Comment Erase Preset Video Light Probe
2

Function
( ) ? ! " = ~ + %
OB OB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 - BS Tbl 1 Tbl 2

Q W E R T Y U I O P Calc 1 Calc 2

A S D F G H J K L Return Map

Shift Z X C V B N M . / Shift

Space Space Control Enter

Mode

Function Keys
There are 6 function keys (5 enabled, 1 disabled) and two arrow keys.

To display a function menu, press the desired function key.

The LED on that function key will light.

Arrow keys are used to select an item from each function menu display.

To cancel the function press the LIGHTED function key a second time.

Time Saver
If the proper measurement has already been made (i.e. distance, circumfer-
ence or area) using generic measurements, immediately after making the
measurement, simply:

• Select the proper function key to display that function's menu.


• Use the ARROW key to select the desired calculation (i.e. BPD, CRL,
AC, etc.)
• Press ENTER and the measurement will be recorded as the calculation
selected.

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-3


6-1 OB Tbl 1

6-1-1 BPD (Biparietal


Diameter)
Fetal age may be estimated by measuring the biparietal diameter.

Mid Line

Measure the maximum width of


the fetal head.

DISPLAY

OB 1 BPD 2 CRL 3 FL 4 AC 5 HC
Tbl 1


If necessary, use the ARROW keys to select BPD.
1 BPD 2 CRL 3 FL 4 AC 5 HC


Press the DIST key. The cursor "+" is displayed.
Dist


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
T.B. point.


Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point "+" cursor will appear.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite point of
T.B. the measurement.


Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value.
Meas

▼ Press the ENTER key. Gestation will be displayed on the left side of the
Enter screen.

NOTE: Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE, or


PROBE to erase the display. To erase the measurement result,
press the OFF key. To erase the Function Menu, press OB
TBL1 (LED will go out).

6-4 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


TABLE 6-1
BPD Factory Stored Table

Table 6-1 is the factory-stored BPD in mm Gestational Age BPD in mm Gestational Age
table of fetal age values for (User Input) (Displayed Output) (User Input) (Displayed Output)
BPDs from 20 to 100 mm.
20 12W1D ±6D
21 12W4D ±6D 61 25W0D ±9D
22 12W6D ±6D 62 25W2D ±9D
23 13W1D ±6D 63 25W5D ±9D
24 13W2D ±6D 64 26W1D ±9D
25 13W4D ±6D 65 26W3D ±9D
26 13W6D ±6D 66 26W6D ±9D
27 14W1D ±6D 67 27W1D ±9D
28 14W4D ±6D 68 27W4D ±9D
29 14W5D ±6D 69 28W0D ±9D
30 15W0D ±6D 70 28W2D ±9D
31 15W2D ±6D 71 28W5D ±9D
32 15W4D ±6D 72 29W1D ±9D
33 15W6D ±6D 73 29W4D ±9D
34 16W1D ±6D 74 29W6D ±9D
35 16W4D ±6D 75 30W3D ±14D
36 16W6D ±6D 76 30W6D ±14D
37 17W1D ±6D 77 31W1D ±14D
38 17W3D ±6D 78 31W4D ±14D
39 17W5D ±6D 79 32W0D ±14D
40 18W0D ±10D 80 32W4D ±14D
41 18W2D ±10D 81 32W6D ±14D
42 18W4D ±10D 82 33W2D ±14D
43 18W6D ±10D 83 33W6D ±14D
44 19W1D ±10D 84 34W1D ±14D
45 19W4D ±10D 85 34W5D ±14D
46 19W6D ±10D 86 35W1D ±14D
47 20W1D ±10D 87 35W4D ±14D
48 20W4D ±10D 88 36W1D ±25D
49 20W6D ±10D 89 36W4D ±25D
50 21W1D ±10D 90 37W0D ±25D
51 21W4D ±10D 91 37W4D ±25D
52 21W6D ±10D 92 38W0D ±25D
53 22W1D ±10D 93 38W4D ±25D
54 22W4D ±10D 94 38W6D ±25D
55 22W6D ±10D 95 39W3D ±25D
56 23W1D ±10D 96 39W6D ±25D
57 23W2D ±10D 97 40W4D ±25D
58 23W6D ±10D 98 41W0D ±25D
59 24W1D ±9D 99 41W4D ±25D
60 24W4D ±9D 100 42W0D ±25D

Source: Hadlock FP, J Ultrasound Med, 1:97-104 (April1982).


Measurements were taken from outer border to inner border of the skull wall.

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-5


6-1-2 CRL (Crown
Rump Length)
This is a method to estimate gestation by measuring crown rump length.

*Measure crown rump length.

DISPLAY

OB 1 BPD 2 CRL 3 FL 4 AC 5 HC
Tbl 1


Use the ARROW keys to select CRL.

1 BPD 2 CRL 3 FL 4 AC 5 HC

Press the DIST key. The cursor "+" is displayed.
Dist


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
T.B. point.


Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point "+" cursor will appear.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite point of
T.B. the measurement.


Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value.
Meas


Press the ENTER key. Gestation will be displayed on the left side of the
Enter screen.

NOTE: Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE, or


PROBE to erase the display. To erase the measurement result,
press the OFF key. To erase the Function Menu, press OB
TBL 1 (LED will go out).

6-6 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


TABLE 6-2
CRL Factory Stored Tables

Table 6-2 is the factory stored CRL in mm Gestational Age CRL in mm Gestational Age
table of fetal age values for (User Input) (Displayed Output) (User Input) (Displayed Output)
CRLs from 6 to 78mm.
6mm 06W3D±5D 45mm 11W3D±5D
7 06W4D±5D 46 11W3D±6D
8 06W6D±6D 47 11W4D±5D
9 07W0D±5D 48 11W5D±5D
10 07W2D±6D 49 11W5D±6D

11 07W3D±5D 50 11W6D±5D
12 07W4D±5D 51 11W6D±6D
13 07W5D±5D 52 12W0D±5D
14 07W6D±5D 53 12W1D±5D
15 08W0D±5D 54 12W1D±6D

16 08W1D±5D 55 12W2D±5D
17 08W2D±6D 56 12W2D±6D
18 08W3D±6D 57 12W3D±5D
19 08W4D±5D 58 12W3D±6D
20 08W5D±5D 59 12W4D±5D

21 08W6D±5D 60 12W4D±6D
22 09W0D±5D 61 12W5D±6D
23 09W1D±5D 62 12W6D±5D
24 09W2D±5D 63 12W6D±6D
25 09W3D±6D 64 13W0D±5D

26 09W4D±5D 65 13W0D±6D
27 09W4D±6D 66 13W1D±5D
28 09W5D±5D 67 13W1D±6D
29 09W6D±5D 68 13W2D±5D
30 09W6D±6D 69 13W2D±6D

31 10W0D±6D 70 13W3D±5D
32 10W1D±5D 71 13W3D±6D
33 10W2D±5D 72 13W4D±5D
34 10W2D±6D 73 13W4D±6D
35 10W4D±5D 74 13W5D±5D

36 10W4D±5D 75 13W5D±6D
37 10W5D±5D 76 13W6D±5D
38 10W5D±6D 77 13W6D±6D
39 10W6D±5D 78 14W0D±5D
40 11W0D±5D

41 11W0D±6D
42 11W1D±5D
43 11W1D±6D
44 11W2D±6D

Source: Robinson HP, Fleming (10), revised by Yeh and Rabmowitz, Radiology,
Volume 166, Number 1, Pages 97-103, 1988

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-7


6-1-3 FL (Femur Length)
This is a method to estimate gestation by measuring the femur length.

*Measure femur length.

DISPLAY

OB
1 BPD 2 CRL 3 FL 4 AC 5 HC
Tbl 1


Use the ARROW keys to select FL.

1 BPD 2 CRL 3 FL 4 AC 5 HC


Press the DIST key. The cursor "+" is displayed.
Dist


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
T.B. point.


Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point "+" cursor will appear.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite point of
T.B. the measurement.


Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value.
Meas


Press the ENTER key. Gestation will be displayed on the left side of the
Enter screen.

NOTE: Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE, or


PROBE to erase the display. To erase the measurement result,
press the OFF key. To erase the Function Menu, press OB
TBL1 (LED will go out).

6-8 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


Table 6-3
FL Factory Stored Table

Table 6-3 is the factory-stored


table of fetal age values for FLs
from 10 to 79mm.

FL in mm Gestational Age FL in mm Gestational Age


(User Input) (Displayed Output) (User Input) (Displayed Output)

10mm 12W6D±06D 45mm 24W3D±10D


11 13W1D±06D 46 24W6D±10D
12 13W3D±06D 47 25W2D±10D
13 13W4D±06D 48 25W5D±10D
14 13W6D±06D 49 26W1D±10D

15mm 14W1D±06D 50mm 26W3D±10D


16 14W3D±06D 51 27W0D±10D
17 14W6D±06D 52 27W3D±10D
18 15W1D±06D 53 27W6D±10D
19 15W3D±06D 54 28W1D±10D

20mm 15W5D±06D 55mm 28W5D±10D


21 16W0D±06D 56 29W1D±10D
22 16W2D±06D 57 29W4D±10D
23 16W4D±06D 58 30W0D±10D
24 16W6D±06D 59 30W3D±10D

25mm 17W1D±06D 60mm 30W6D±10D


26 17W4D±06D 61 31W3D±10D
27 17W6D±06D 62 31W6D±10D
28 18W1D±06D 63 32W2D±10D
29 18W4D±06D 64 32W6D±10D

30mm 18W6D±06D 65mm 33W2D±10D


31 19W1D±06D 66 33W6D±10D
32 19W4D±06D 67 34W1D±10D
33 19W6D±06D 68 34W5D±10D
34 20W2D±06D 69 35W1D±10D

35mm 20W5D±06D 70mm 35W5D±10D


36 21W0D±06D 71 36W1D±11D
37 21W3D±06D 72 36W5D±11D
38 21W6D±06D 73 37W1D±11D
39 22W1D±06D 74 37W5D±11D

40mm 22W3D±06D 75mm 38W2D±11D


41 22W6D±06D 76 38W6D±11D
42 23W2D±06D 77 39W2D±11D
43 23W5D±06D 78 39W6D±11D
44 24W1D±10D 79 40W3D±11D

Source: Hadlock et al: AJR 138:877 (1982)

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-9


6-1-4 AC (Abdominal
Circumference)
This is a method to estimate gestational age by measuring the abdominal
circumference of the fetus. Circumference measurement can be obtained
by using the TRACE/AREA or two distance measurements.

DISPLAY

1 BPD 2 CRL 3 FL 4 AC 5 HC
OB
Tbl 1


Use the ARROW keys to select AC.

1 BPD 2 CRL 3 FL 4 AC 5 HC


Press the TRACE/AREA key to trace the circumference. (Perform two
Trace
Area distance measurements and press ENTER for a two diameter method [see
Section 6-1-6]).


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
T.B. point.


Press SET. The starting point cursor is locked and the "+" cursor changes
Set to a dot cursor.


Using the TRACKBALL, the dot cursor traces the object to be measured.
T.B. The trace is displayed as a continuous curve and the measured value in mm
is displayed on the left side of the screen.


Press MEAS. The cursor is locked and measured values are fixed.
Meas


Press the ENTER key. Gestation will be displayed on the left side of the
Enter screen.

NOTE: If the TRACE/AREA key is pressed in the middle of the mea-


surement, the cursor and measured values will be cleared
(LED will go out). To complete a measurement, repeat the
above procedure.

To erase the measurement results, press the OFF key. To


erase the Function Menu, press OB TBL1 (LED will go out).

6-10 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


Table 6-4
AC Factory Stored Table

Table 6-4 is the factory-stored


table of fetal age values for
ACs from 44 to 355mm.
AC in mm Gestational Age AC in mm Gestational Age
(User Input) (Displayed Output) (User Input) (Displayed Output)

44-49mm 12W0D±13D 228-232mm 27W0D±15D


50-56 12W3D±13D 233-237 27W3D±15D
57-63 13W0D±13D 238-243 28W0D±15D

64-70 13W3D±13D 244-248 28W3D±15D


71-76 14W0D±13D 249-253 29W0D±15D
77-83 14W3D±13D 254-258 29W3D±15D

84-89 15W0D±13D 259-263 30W0D±15D


90-96 15W3D±13D 264-268 30W3D±21D
97-102 16W0D±13D 269-273 31W0D±21D

103-109 16W3D±13D 274-278 31W3D±21D


110-115 17W0D±13D 279-283 32W0D±21D
116-122 17W3D±13D 284-288 32W3D±21D

123-128 18W0D±13D 289-293 33W0D±21D


129-134 18W3D±14D 294-297 33W3D±21D
135-140 19W0D±14D 298-302 34W0D±21D

141-147 19W3D±14D 303-307 34W3D±21D


148-153 20W0D±14D 308-311 35W0D±21D
154-159 20W3D±14D 312-316 35W3D±21D

160-165 21W0D±14D 317-320 36W0D±21D


166-171 21W3D±14D 321-325 36W3D±18D
172-176 22W0D±14D 326-329 37W0D±18D

177-182 22W3D±14D 330-334 37W3D±18D


183-188 23W0D±14D 335-338 38W0D±18D
189-194 23W3D±14D 339-342 38W3D±18D

195-199 24W0D±14D 342-346 39W0D±18D


200-205 24W3D±15D 347-350 40W3D±18D
206-210 25W0D±15D 351-355 40W0D±18D

211-216 25W3D±15D
217-221 26W0D±15D
222-227 26W3D±15D

Source: Hadlock, et al. RE: Am. J. Radiology 139:367-370, 1982.


Gestational age calculated from 50th percentile data.

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-11


6-1-5 HC (Head
Circumference)
A fetal age can be estimated by measuring the fetal head circumference.
Circumference measurement can be obtained by using the TRACE/AREA
or two distance measurements.

DISPLAY

OB 1 BPD 2 CRL 3 FL 4 AC 5 HC
Tbl 1


Use the ARROW keys to select HC.
1 BPD 2 CRL 3 FL 4 AC 5 HC


Press the TRACE/AREA key. (Perform two distance measurements and
Trace
Area press ENTER for a two diameter method [see Section 6-1-6]).


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
T.B. point.


Press SET. The starting point cursor is locked and the "+" cursor changes
Set
to a dot cursor.


Using the TRACKBALL, the dot cursor traces the object to be measured.
T.B. The trace is displayed as a continuous curve and the measured value in mm
is displayed on the left side of the screen.


Press MEAS. The cursor is locked and measured values are fixed.
Meas


Press the ENTER key. Gestation will be displayed on the left side of the
Enter screen.

NOTE: If the TRACE/AREA key is pressed in the middle of the mea-


surement, the cursor and measured values will be cleared
(LED will go out). To complete a measurement, repeat the
above procedure.

To erase the measurement results, press the OFF key. To


erase the Function Menu, press OB TBL1 (LED will go out).

6-12 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


Table 6-5
HC Factory Stored Table

Table 6-5 is the factory-stored HC in mm Gestational Age HC in mm Gestational Age


table of fetal age values for (User Input) (Display Output) (User Input) (Display Output)
HCs from 67 to 354mm.
67-70mm 12W0D±9D 248-252mm 27W0D±16D
71-78 12W3D±9D 253-257 27W3D±16D
79-83 13W0D±9D 258-261 28W0D±16D
84-92 13W3D±9D 262-266 28W3D±16D
93-99 14W0D±9D 267-270 29W0D±16D

100-106 14W3D±9D 271-275 29W3D±16D


107-113 15W0D±9D 276-279 30W0D±16D
114-120 15W3D±9D 280-283 30W3D±19D
121-127 16W0D±9D 284-288 31W0D±19D
128-133 16W3D±9D 289-292 31W3D±19D

134-140 17W0D±9D 293-295 32W0D±19D


141-146 17W3D±9D 296-299 32W3D±19D
147-153 18W0D±9D 300-303 33W0D±19D
154-159 18W3D±11D 304-307 33W3D±19D
160-165 19W0D±11D 308-310 34W0D±19D

166-171 19W3D±11D 311-313 34W3D±19D


172-177 20W0D±11D 314-317 35W0D±19D
178-183 20W3D±11D 318-320 35W3D±19D
184-189 21W0D±11D 321-323 36W0D±19D
190-195 21W3D±11D 324-326 36W3D±24D

196-200 22W0D±11D 327-329 37W0D±24D


201-206 22W3D±11D 330-332 37W3D±24D
207-211 23W0D±11D 333-335 38W0D±24D
212-217 23W3D±11D 336-338 38W3D±24D
218-222 24W0D±11D 339-341 39W0D±24D

223-227 24W3D±16D 342-343 39W3D±24D


228-232 25W0D±16D 344-346 40W0D±24D
233-237 25W3D±16D 347-349 40W3D±24D
238-242 26W0D±16D 350-351 41W0D±24D
243-247 26W3D±16D 352-353 41W3D±24D
354 42W0D±24D

Source: Hadlock FP: Ultrasound in Obstetric and Gynecology 1:31, 1981.

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-13


6-1-6 AC/HC (Two
Diameter Method)
To estimate gestational age from a two-diameter circumference calculation:

Freeze
FREEZE the B-Mode image.

To measure the anterior-posterior diameter:



Press the DIST key. The measurement cursor appears.
Dist


T.B. Use the TRACKBALL to position the first cursor.

▼ Press the SET key to fix the first cursor and enables the second cursor.
Set


T.B. Use the TRACKBALL to position the second cursor.


Press the MEAS key to fix the second cursor and record the anterior-
Meas posterior diameter.


Press the DIST key. The measurement cursor appears.
Dist


T.B. Use the TRACKBALL to position the first cursor.


Press the SET key to fix the first cursor and enables the second cursor.
Set


T.B. Use the TRACKBALL to position the second cursor.


Press the MEAS key to fix the second cursor and record the lateral diameter.
Meas


(continued)

6-14 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


6-1-6 AC/HC (Two
Diameter Method)
(continued)


OB
Press the OB TBL 1 (Factory Preset Table) or OB TBL 2 (User Program-
OB
Tbl 1 or Tbl 2 mable Table) key.

DISPLAY

TBL 1 1 BPD 2 CRL 3 FL 4 AC 5 HC


Use the Function LEFT/RIGHT ARROW keys to select HC (Head Circum-
ference) or AC (Abdominal Circumference).


Press the ENTER key.
Enter

The system computes the gestational age from the calculated circumfer-
ence, then stores circumference and diameters for display on the report
page.

6-2 OB Tbl 2
Up to five user programmable tables can be put into OB TBL 2 by using the
CONTROL, G, 0 function.

NOTE: The title must be no larger than six letters.

Input has to be in 3 digits. The number of weeks has to be


between 0 and 63.

The number of days must be between 0 and 6.

The standard deviation (days, weeks) can be 0-15 days, 0-9


weeks, or x.

Up to 96 data fields can be entered per table. It is recom-


mended that the worksheet on OB TBL 2 be copied and filled
out prior to entering the table data into the system.

NOTE: Menu levels 1 through 3 are for single distance measurements.


Menu levels 4 and 5 are for circumference.

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-15


6-2-1 Programming
Gestational Age +

Data
Control G 0

This Control key function is used to allow user gestational age data to be
inputted into OB TBL 2.

The user may input up to five different tables for selection by OB TBL 2.
Tables 1 through 3 correspond to distance measurements. Tables 4 and 5
correspond to circumference measurements.

DISPLAY

CONTROL : ___
Control


CONTROL : G ___
G GESTATIONAL DATA


+ CONTROL : G0 ___
0 GESTATIONAL DATA/ INPUT


Press the ENTER key.
Enter


( ) ? CONTROL : G0
1 2 3 4 5 MENU LEVEL = 1/TITLE = ___
Select one of the five available user OB Tables in which you want to input
data.

NOTE: If an error is made in MENU LEVEL, press BS (backspace)


key to erase your selection and re-enter the table number.

Input Title CONTROL : G0
6 char. max.
MENU LEVEL = 1/TITLE = BPD___
BPD = BIPARIETAL DIAMETER:
Input the title (6 characters) of your menu selection.

Return CONTROL : G0
MENU LEVEL : 1/TITLE = BPD/
MIN. = ___mm
Press RETURN then enter the minimum measurement value (3 digits),
▼ i.e. 20mm = 020mm.
(continued)

6-16 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


6-2-1 Programming
Gestational Age
Data (continued)


Input CONTROL : G0
Minimal MENU LEVEL = 1/TITLE = BPD/MIN. = 020mm
Value

NOTE: When setting the minimal value, the recommendation is to set


it smaller than the minimal value in the gestation table.


CONTROL : G0
Return (01)020mm : __WO ± /MENU LEVEL = 1 (BPD)
At this stage, the list of measurements is shown on the monitor.


CONTROL : G0

Enter Weeks (01)020mm : 12W ___D ± /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)


Enter the weeks as a 2 digit number.


CONTROL : G0
Enter Days (01)020mm : 12W1D ± ___ /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Enter the days as a 1 digit number.


Enter standard CONTROL : G0
deviation, (01)020mm : 12W1D ± 06 ___ /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
weeks, days Enter the standard deviation as a 2 digit number. Enter "x" if no standard
or x deviation is needed.


CONTROL : G0
Return (02)021mm : ___ WD ± /MENULEVEL = 1(BPD)
Press RETURN. Repeat the above steps to enter the remaining values for
the weeks, days and standard deviation in the chart selected.

CONTROL : ___
Enter When all the menu entries are completed, press ENTER to store the table
in the system memory.

NOTE: When the 96th data entry is put in, the system beeps and
shows a FILL annotation. If this happens, stop entering data
and press the ENTER key.

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-17


6-2-2 Editing
Gestational Age ( ) ?
Control G 1 2 3 4 5
Data

To correct errors in user programmable tables.

DISPLAY

CONTROL : ___
Control


CONTROL : G ___
G GESTATIONAL DATA


( ) ? CONTROL : G1 ___
1 2 3 4 5 GESTATIONAL DATA/LIST-EDITOR
Select the list from OB TBL 2 to be revised.


CONTROL : G1
Enter _mm : WD ± /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Press the ENTER key. At this time the list will be displayed on the monitor.


CONTROL : G1
Enter the
distance ( ) 020mm : WD ± /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD).
value to be Enter the measurement value you wish to revise.
revised


(continued)

6-18 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


6-2-2 Editing
Gestational Age
Data (continued)


CONTROL : G1
Return (02)021mm : ___ WD ±/MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Press RETURN. The measurement value you want to revise is highlighted
on the list.

CONTROL : G1

Enter Weeks (02)021 mm : 12W ___D ± /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)


Enter the new value for weeks. Data should be in 2 digits.


CONTROL : G1
Enter Days (02)021mm : 12W1D ± ___ /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
Enter the new value for days as one digit. A value of 7 or less.


Enter standard CONTROL : G1
deviation, (02)021mm : 12W D ± 06 ___/MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)
weeks, days Enter the new value for standard deviation as two digits. "x" can be used if
or x no standard deviation is needed.


CONTROL : G1
Return ( ) ___mm : W D ± /MENU LEVEL = 1(BPD)


CONTROL : ___
Enter Press ENTER when all corrections have been completed.

Tables 6-6 and 6-7 can be used as a coding worksheet for programming your
personal OB Tables.

Duplicate this worksheet if you intend to program more than two tables.
Keep a written record of your personal tables in this operator manual.

REMEMBER: Tables 1, 2 and 3 are set up as distance measurement


tables. Tables 4 and 5 are set up as circumference
tables.

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-19


Table 6-6
Coding Sheet

6-20
MENU LEVEL = __ TITLE = __ __ __ __ __ __

1 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 25 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 49 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 73 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __


2 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 26 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 50 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 74 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
3 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 27 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 51 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 75 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __

4 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 28 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 52 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 76 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __


5 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 29 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 53 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 77 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
6 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 30 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 54 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 78 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __

7 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 31 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 55 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 79 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __


8 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 32 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 56 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 80 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __

FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS


9 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 33 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 57 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 81 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __

10 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 34 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 58 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 82 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __


11 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 35 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 59 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 83 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
12 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 36 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 60 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 84 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __

13 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 37 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 61 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 85 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __


14 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 38 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 62 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 86 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
15 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 39 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 63 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 87 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __

16 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 40 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 64 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 88 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __


17 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 41 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 65 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 89 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
18 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 42 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 66 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 90 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __

19 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 43 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 67 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 91 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __


20 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 44 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 68 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 92 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
21 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 45 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 69 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 93 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __

22 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 46 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 70 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 94 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __


23 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 47 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 71 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 95 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
24 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 48 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 72 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 96 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __

46-030370 REV 0
Table 6-7
Coding Sheet

MENU LEVEL = __ TITLE = __ __ __ __ __ __

46-030370 REV 0
1 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 25 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 49 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 73 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
2 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 26 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 50 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 74 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __

3 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 27 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 51 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 75 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __


4 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 28 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 52 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 76 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
5 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 29 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 53 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 77 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __

6 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 30 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 54 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 78 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __


7 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 31 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 55 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 79 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
8 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 32 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 56 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 80 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __

9 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 33 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 57 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 81 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __


10 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 34 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 58 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 82 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
11 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 35 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 59 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 83 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __

12 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 36 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 60 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 84 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __


13 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 37 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 61 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 85 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
14 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 38 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 62 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 86 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __

15 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 39 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 63 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 87 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __


16 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 40 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 64 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 88 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
17 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 41 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 65 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 89 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __

18 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 42 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 66 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 90 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __


19 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 43 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 67 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 91 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
20 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 44 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 68 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 92 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __

21 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 45 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 69 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 93 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __


22 46 70 94

FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS


__ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __
23 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 47 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 71 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 95 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __

24 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 48 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 72 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __ 96 __ __ __ mm __ __ W__ D ± __ __

6-21
6-3 Calc 1
Five types of calculations are available.

Circumference (mm) Circumference is calculated by using the formula


to approximate an ellipse circumference. It is
necessary to make two distance measurements.

Volume (cm3) Volume is calculated by a formula corresponding


to the number of measurements made. Volumes
can be calculated using one, two or three mea-
surements.

Heart Rate (per minute) Heart rate per minute is calculated by measuring
the interval between two beats in M-Mode.

Velocity (mm/s) Velocity is calculated by using the amplitude


measured in M-Mode.

A/B (ratio) Ratio is calculated by comparing two distance


measurements.

NOTE: When you repeat any of the above CALC 1 calculations, you
must press the OFF key first to clear the calculation register.

Failure to do so will cause the second calculation to use the


first set of measurements.

6-22 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


6-3-1 Circumference
The circumference can be computed by using a formula for ellipse; with this
method two distance measurements are needed to determine the circumfer-
ence (unit: mm). As many as four circumference calculations can be
displayed.

Measure the minor axis (a) and


the major axis (b).

b
a

DISPLAY
1 CIRC 2 VOL 3 HR 4 VELO 5 A/B A+Bx
Calc 1

▼ If necessary, use the ARROW keys to select circumference (CIRC)


1 CIRC 2 VOL 3 HR 4 VELO 5 A/B A+Bx


Press the DIST key. The cursor "+" ("x") is displayed. (The second cursor
Dist is an "x" cursor).


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" ("x") cursor to the measurement
T.B. starting point.


Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point "+" ("x") cursor will appear.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite point of
T.B. the measurement.

▼ Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value. Repeat the distance
Meas measurement steps a second time for distance b. (See the diagram above.)

After the two distance measurements have been made, press ENTER.
Enter Circumference will be displayed on the left side of the screen.

NOTE: Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE or


PROBE to erase all measurement results. To erase the Func-
tion Menu, press CALC 1. (LED will go out.)

See the following page for the procedure to calculate additional circumfer-
ence measurements.

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-23


6-3-1 Circumference
(continued) The following steps can be repeated to display as many as four circumfer-
ence calculations. To check your work or measure another part of the image,
follow the procedure below to calculate an additional circumference mea-
surement.

Press the OFF key. The distance measurements and cursors will be erased.
Off
The circumference calculation(s) will remain.


Press the DIST key. The "+" ("x") cursor will be displayed. (The second
Dist cursor is an "x" cursor.)


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" ("x") cursor to the measurement
T.B. starting point.


Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point "+" ("x") cursor will appear.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite point of
T.B. the measurement.


Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value. Repeat the distance
Meas measurements steps a second time for distance b. (See the diagram on the
previous page).

After the two distance measurements have been made, press ENTER. The
Enter additional circumference measurement will be displayed on the screen.

NOTE: These steps can be repeated to display as many as four


circumference calculations. The most recent calculation dis-
plays below the other results.

Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE, or


PROBE to erase all measurement calculations.

To erase the Function Menu, press CALC 1 (LED will go out).

6-24 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


6-3-2 Volume
The volume calculation selected from CALC 1 can be made by a one, two
or three diameter method.

One Measurement If only one measurement is made before the ENTER


key is pressed, the measurement will be displayed
and a volume computed for a sphere of that diam-
eter. If the system is unfrozen, this measurement will
be lost.

Two Measurement If only two measurements are made before the


ENTER key is pressed, the measurements will be
displayed and a volume computed for a spheroid
having those two diameters and a third diameter
equal to the mean of the two diameters measured. If
the system is unfrozen, the two measurements will
be lost.

Three Measurements Three measurements are easily taken in the dual


B-Mode (split screen) display format. If three mea-
surements are made before the ENTER key is
pressed, the measurements will be displayed and a
volume computed for a spheroid of those three
diameters. If the system is unfrozen, the three
measurements will be lost.

Four Measurements If four measurements are made before the ENTER


key is pressed (not normally done but possible with
the RT 3200 Advantage - I), the last diameter is
ignored and the system operates as for three diam-
eters, using the first three measurements. If the
system is unfrozen, all measurements will be lost.

NOTE: If the three diameter method is used, the multi-image function


may be used in order to avoid losing data when the system is
unfrozen to scan the second view.

The following details the three diameter method for volume measurement
and calculations using the dual B-Mode format. It is followed by a method
that can be used with the full screen format.

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-25


6-3-2 Volume
(continued)

Three Diameter Method in


Split Screen Mode
Volume is calculated by using an approximate method for an ellipsoid. It is
necessary to make three measurements on two screens to calculate volume
(unit: cm3). As many as four volume calculations can be displayed.

a b c

The formula used to calculate volume is: Vcm3 = .523 x (a • b • c)

In order to calculate volume, follow the procedure below.

Multi Image
Press the MULTI-IMAGE LEFT ARROW key. Scan the object in either a
sagittal or axial plane.


Freeze Press FREEZE to freeze the left image.


Multi Image
Press the MULTI-IMAGE RIGHT ARROW key to activate the right image.
Scan the object in the appropriate scan plane.


Freeze Press FREEZE to freeze the right image.


(continued)

6-26 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


6-3-2 Volume

Three Diameter Method in


Split Screen Mode
(continued)
DISPLAY

1 CIRC 2 VOL 3 HR 4 VELO 5 A/B A+Bx
Calc 1


Use the ARROW keys to select volume (VOL)
1 CIRC 2 VOL 3 HR 4 VELO 5 A/B A+BxC*


Press the DIST key. The "+" ("x", "x") cursor is displayed. ("x" is the second
Dist cursor, "x" is the third cursor)


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor ("x", "x") to the measurement
T.B. starting point.


Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point cursor "+", ("x", "x") will appear.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the end of the
T.B. measurement.


Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value. Repeat the distance
Meas measurement steps a second time for distance b and a third time for distance
c. (See the diagram on the previous page for distance b and c.)

When all three distance measurements have been made, press ENTER.
Enter The volume will be displayed on the left side of the screen in cubic cm.

NOTE: Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE, or


PROBE to erase all measurement results.

To erase the Function Menu, press CALC 1 (LED will go out).

See the following page for the procedure to calculate additional volume
measurements.

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-27


6-3-2 Volume

Three Diameter Method in


Split Screen Mode
(continued) The following steps can be repeated to display as many as four volume
calculations. If you want to check your work or measure another part of the
image, follow the procedure below to calculate an additional volume mea-
surement.

Press the OFF key. The distance measurements and cursors will be erased.
Off
The volume calculation(s) will remain.


Press the DIST key. The "+" ("x", "x") cursor is displayed. ("x" is the second
Dist cursor, "x" is the third cursor)


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor ("x", "x") to the measurement
T.B. starting point.


Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point cursor "+", ("x", "x") will appear.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the end of the
T.B. measurement.


Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value. Repeat the distance
Meas
measurement steps a second time for distance b and a third time for distance
c. (See the diagram on the previous page for distances b and c.)

When all three distance measurements have been made, press ENTER.
Enter
The volume will be displayed on the left side of the screen in cubic cm.

NOTE: These steps can be repeated to display as many as four volume


calculations. The most recent calculation is displayed below
the other results.

Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE, or


PROBE to erase all measurement results.

To erase the Function Menu, press CALC 1 (LED will go out).

6-28 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


6-3-2 Volume
(continued) If the dual B-Mode (split screen) display format is not used, the three
measurements can still be employed. To use the three measurement
method with the full screen display format, perform the following steps:

Three Diameter Method in


Full Screen Mode
First Measurement

Scan the patient in the sagittal plane to obtain the necessary image with the
Freeze proper orientation. Freeze the image.


Press the DIST key. The "+" cursor is displayed.
Dist


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
T.B. point.


Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point cursor "+" will appear.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite end of
T.B. the measurement.


Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value. If this is the only
Meas distance to be measured, press ENTER.

NOTE: Write down the first measurement. When unfreezing the


image, this measurement will be lost.


Unfreeze the image and scan in the axial plane.
Freeze


Freeze the desired image.
Freeze


(continued)

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-29


6-3-2 Volume

Three Diameter Method in


Full Screen Mode
First Measurement
(continued)


Since it is necessary to have all measurements on the screen before
Dist pressing ENTER, press DIST to make a simulated (dummy) first measure-
ment at the top of the screen or outside of the image area.


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor outside the image area.
T.B.


Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point "+" cursor will appear.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor so that the measure-
T.B. ment is the same as was recorded in the sagittal plane. See Illustration 6-2.

▼ Press MEAS. This previously recorded measurement must be entered first.


Meas

Illustration 6-2
Simulated First Measurement

+--------+

First Measurement

6-30 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


6-3-2 Volume
(continued)
Now measure the second and third measurements on the frozen image.
Three Diameter Method in
Full Screen Mode
Second Measurement

Press the DIST key. The "x" cursor is displayed.


Dist


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "x" cursor to the measurement starting
T.B. point.


Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point cursor "x" will appear.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite end of
T.B. the measurement.


Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value. If this is the last distance
Meas to be measured, press ENTER.

Do NOT press ENTER if you wish to make a third measurement. Proceed


Enter with the third diameter.

Illustration 6-3
Three Diameter Method—Full
Screen Mode
+--------+
First Measurement

x Second Measurement

x x
x
Third Measurement

46-030370 REV 02 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-31


6-3-2 Volume
(continued)

Three Diameter Method in


Full Screen Mode
Third Measurement

Press the DIST key. The "x" cursor is displayed.


Dist


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "x" cursor to the measurement starting
T.B. point.


Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point cursor "x" will appear.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite end of
T.B. the measurement.


Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value.
Meas

When all measurements have been taken, press the ENTER key.
Enter
The volume will be displayed on the left side of the screen in cubic cm.

6-32 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 02


6-3-3 Heart Rate
Heart rate in beats per minute is calculated by measuring the interval
between two heart beats (unit: beats/minute). This measurement must be
done on an M-Mode display. As many as four heart rate calculations can be
displayed.

Measure the distance between


two heart beats in M-Mode.
HR = 60x2/lapsed time.

DISPLAY (B/M-Mode or M-Mode)

1 CIRC 2 VOL 3 HR 4 VELO 5 A/B A+Bx


Calc 1


Use the ARROW keys to select heart rate (HR)
1 CIRC 2 VOL 3 HR 4 VELO 5 A/B TIME +


Press the DIST key. The "+" cursor is displayed.
Dist


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
T.B. point.


Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point cursor "+" will appear.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the end of the
T.B. measurement.


Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value.
Meas

Press ENTER. The heart rate will be displayed on the left side of the screen
Enter in beats per minute.

NOTE: Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE, or


PROBE to erase all measurement results. To erase the Func-
tion Menu, press CALC 1 (LED will go out.)

See the following page for the procedure to calculate additional heart rate
measurements.

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-33


6-3-3 Heart Rate
(continued)
The following steps can be repeated to display as many as four heart rate
calculations. If you want to check your work or measure another part of the
image, follow the procedure below to calculate additional heart rate mea-
surement.

Press the OFF key. The distance measurement and cursors will be erased.
Off The Heart rate calculation will remain.


Press the DIST key. The "+" cursor is displayed.
Dist


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
T.B. point.


Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point cursor "+" will appear.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the end of the
T.B. measurement.


Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value.
Meas

Press ENTER. The heart rate will be displayed on the left side of the screen
Enter in beats per minute.

NOTE: The distance measurement on the M-Mode image is actually


the horizontal difference between the two cursors.

Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE, or


PROBE to erase all measurement results.

To erase the Function Menu, press CALC 1 (LED will go out).

6-34 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


6-3-4 Velocity
Velocity is calculated by measuring an amplitude in the M-Mode portion of
the display only. The velocity will be displayed as mm/second. As many as
four velocity calculations can be displayed.

Measure the distance


X of a bright line in M-
X
Mode. (B/M- and M-
Modes) VELO = height
of a wave/elapsed time

DISPLAY

1 CIRC 2 VOL 3 HR 4 VELO 5 A/B A+Bx


Calc 1


Use the ARROW keys to select velocity (VELO).
1 CIRC 2 VOL 3 HR 4 VELO 5 A/B VELO+Display
(B/M-Mode or M-
Mode)

Dist Press the DIST key. The "+" cursor is displayed.


T.B. Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
point.

Set Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point cursor "+" will appear.


T.B. Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the end of the
measurement.

Meas Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value.

Enter Press ENTER. The velocity will be displayed on the left side of the screen
in mm/s (millimeters per second).

NOTE: Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE or


PROBE to erase all measurement results.

To erase the Function Menu, press CALC 1 (LED will go out).

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-35


6-3-4 Velocity
(continued) The following steps can be repeated to display as many as four velocity
calculations. To check your work or measure another part of the image,
follow the procedure below to calculate an additional velocity measurement.

Press the OFF key. The distance measurement and cursors will be erased.
Off The velocity calculation will remain.


Press the DIST key. The "+" cursor is displayed.
Dist


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
T.B. point.


Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point cursor "+" will appear.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the end of the
T.B. measurement.


Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value.
Meas

Press ENTER. The velocity will be displayed on the left side of the screen
Enter in mm/second.

NOTE: The distance measurement on the M-Mode image is actually


the vertical difference between the two cursors.

Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE, or


PROBE to erase all measurement results.

To erase the Function Menu, press CALC 1 (LED will go out).

6-36 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


6-3-5 A/B (Calculation
of Ratio)
This measurement is used to calculate a ratio of two measured distances.

x

R = first distance (+)/Second distance (x)


+ ▲ A
Example: To obtain an FL/BPD ratio...
B


+
Measures FL with "+" cursors.
▲ Measure BPD with "x" cursors.
x

DISPLAY

1 CIRC 2 VOL 3 HR 4 VELO 5 A/B A+Bx


Calc 1

Use the ARROW keys to select A/B* ratio (A/B)


▼ 1 CIRC 2 VOL 3 HR 4 VELO 5 A/B A+Bx

* A is the "+" cursor and B is the "x" cursor.



Press the DIST key. The cursor "+" ("x") is displayed. (The second cursor
Dist is an "x" cursor).


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" ("x") cursor to the measurement
T.B. starting point.


Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point "+" ("x") cursor will appear.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite point of
T.B. the measurement.


Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value. Repeat the distance
Meas measurement steps a second time for the "x" cursor (B). (See the diagram
above.)

After the two distance measurements have been made, press ENTER. A/B
Enter ratio will be displayed on the left side of the screen.

NOTE: Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE or


PROBE to erase all measurement results.

To erase the Function Menu, press CALC 1. (LED will go out.)

See the following page for the procedure to calculate additional A/B ratio
measurements.

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-37


6-3-5 A/B (Calculation
of Ratio)
(continued) The following steps can be repeated to display as many as four A/B ratio
calculations. To check your work or measure another part of the image,
follow the procedure below to calculate an additional A/B ratio of two
measured distances.

Press the OFF key. The distance measurements and cursors will be erased.
Off The A/B ratio calculation will remain.


Press the DIST key. The cursor "+" ("x") is displayed. (The second cursor
Dist is an "x" cursor).


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" ("x") cursor to the measurement
T.B. starting point.


Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point "+" ("x") cursor will appear.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite point of
T.B. the measurement.


Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value. Repeat the distance
Meas measurement steps a second time for the "x" cursor (B). (See the diagram
on the previous page.)

After the two distance measurements have been made, press ENTER.
Enter A/B ratio will be displayed on the left side of the screen.

NOTE: Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE or


PROBE to erase all measurement results.

To erase the Function Menu, press CALC 1 (LED will go out).

6-38 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


6-4 Calc 2
Four types of calculations are available.

Estimated Date of Confinement Calculate a due date based on esti-


mated gestation.

Estimated Fetal Body Weight Calculate the fetal body weight based
on either the Shepard/Richards/
Berkowitz model (BPD/AC) or the
Hadlock model (FL/AC).

Stepper Volume (STVOL) A method for measuring volumes is pro-


vided for use with an axial probe and
mechanical stepper assembly. The
mechanical stepper moves the probe by
a fixed increment.

Amniotic Fluid Index Calculate the amniotic fluid index by


taking the distance measurement of the
amniotic fluid depth in each of the four
axial quadrants of the uterine cavity.
The four measurements are calculated
together to formulate the amniotic fluid
index (AFI).

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-39


6-4-1 Estimated Date of
Confinement
This is a method to calculate an estimated date of confinement by using an
estimated gestation.

EDC = 280 - Estimated gestation + examination date

Enter gestational age by using the alphanumeric keys.

DISPLAY

1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 STVOL 4 AFI


Calc 2 (displayed on the lower right of the screen.)


If necessary, use the ARROW keys to select EDC.
1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 STVOL 4 AFI


Enter Weeks Enter the number of weeks in 2 digits.
using A/N
key


Enter Days Enter the number of days (0-7).
using A/N
key


Press ENTER.
Enter Estimated date of confinement will be shown on the left side of the screen
as Month/Day/Year.

NOTE: To erase measurement result, press ERASE twice, SCALE,


NEW PATIENT, or PROBE.

To erase Function Menu, press CALC 2 (LED will go out).

6-40 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


6-4-2 Estimated Fetal
Body Weight
When EFBW is selected from the CALC 2 function, EFBW calculations will
be displayed for two possible fetal body weights. The EFBW's will be labeled
#1 and #2.

Three lines will appear in the text scroll area on the left side of the display.
It will be formatted as shown below.

EFBW:

#1 9999
#2 9999

To display estimated fetal body weight:

DISPLAY

Calc 2 1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 STVOL 4 AFI


Use the ARROW keys to select "EFBW".
1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 STVOL 4 AFI


Enter Press ENTER. EFBW calculations will be displayed on the lower left portion
of the display.

#1 Estimated Fetal
Body Weight
(BPD/AC)
The Estimated Fetal Body Weight #1 (EFBW) is computed using a Shephard/
Richards/Berkowitz model. "An evaluation of two equations for predicting
weight by ultrasound." (Shephard et al., Am. J. Obstet. Gynecol., 142:47-54,
1982)

EFBW is determined according to the equation:

LOG 10 (EFBW) = 3-1.7492 + 0.0166*BPD + 0.0046*AC -


0.00002646*AC*BPD

The above formula yields EFBW in grams when the AC and BPD are in
millimeters. (The machine automatically takes the conversion from kilo-
grams to grams and millimeters to centimeters.) (For OB TBL1 only.)

When EFBW is selected, this calculation is made only if AC and BPD


measurements have already been made. Otherwise, the EFBW #1 field to
the left on the screen will display O.F. or U.F.

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-41


6-4-2 Estimated Fetal
Body Weight
(continued)

#2 Estimated Fetal
Body Weight
(FL/AC)
The Estimated Fetal Body Weight #2 (EFBW) is computed using the
Hadlock model. (Hadlock, F.P., et al,: "Sonographic Estimation of Fetal
Weight", Radiology, 150:535-40, 1984.)

EFBW is determined according to the equation:

LOG10 (EFBW) = 1.3598 + 0.01844*FL + 0.0051*AC - 0.000037*AC*FL

The above formula yields EFBW in grams when the AC and FL are in
millimeters. (The machine automatically makes the conversion from kilo-
grams to grams and millimeters to centimeters.) (For OB TBL1 only.)

When EFBW is selected, this calculation is made only if AC and FL


measurements have already been made. Otherwise, the EFBW #2 field to
the left on the screen will display U.F.

6-42 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


6-4-3 Stepper Volume
Stepper Volume (STVOL) is the method used to calculate the volume of an
organ using the RT 3200 Advantage - I Urology software, a Transaxial
Probe, and a mechanical stepping device that moves the probe in fixed
increments. The calculation is based on the fact that each step or area
measurement is taken at equal stepper increments. The area measured at
each slice is then used to compute the total volume of the organ. For more
details, see Section 7.

Stepper Volume
Increment Selection
Before the stepper volume calculation can be made, ensure that the
mechanical stepper increment used matches the ultrasound system step-
per spacing selection.

CAUTION Standard stepper increment movement is 5.0mm. The stepper can be


reconfigured to move in 2.5mm increments. Therefore it is necessary
to match the stepper movement to the ultrasound system software.
Failure to accurately match the mechanical stepper increment to the
ultrasound system stepper spacing will result in improper volume
calculations.

DISPLAY

CONTROL: ____
Control LED on Control key lights.


CONTROL: T ____
T


? Press the "2" or "5" key for the desired step increment spacing registration.
2 5
"2" for 2.5 mm spacing for area measurements.
"5" for 5.0 mm spacing for area measurements.


Press the ENTER key to complete and store the increment spacing
Enter selection.

This selection will remain stored in the system memory until it is changed by
the Control, T function again.

The CONTROL, T function changes the step increment or re-selects the


present step increment which will cause the current volume and slice
number to be cleared. The next area measurement will then be interpreted
as the first slice of a new volume.

46-030370 REV 01 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-43


6-4-3 Stepper Volume
(continued)

Scan Preparation
Select the Stepper Volume measurement by performing the following steps:

DISPLAY

1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 STVOL 4 AFI


Calc 2


Use the ARROW keys to select Menu Level 3, STVOL.

1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 STVOL 4 AFI

NOTE: While in CALC 2, Menu Level 3 (STVOL), the system slice


increment spacing is displayed in the menu help area to the left
of the GE logo.

It will read :
D = 2.5mm if 2.5 mm increments were selected
D = 5.0mm if 5.0 mm increments were selected

See Illustration 7-19.

CAUTION Ensure that the system selection matches the mechanical stepper
increments to be used.

6-44 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 01


Illustration 6-4
Stepper Increment Selection
Display

04 / 14 / 92
13 : 59 : 27
RA 7MHz
x2.0

G19D54T30 D=5.0mm
GE

System Stepper Increment Selection

6-4-3 Stepper Volume

Scan Preparation
(continued) Position the patient as required for the study indicated.

Insert the probe to the first scan location and secure it to the mechanical
stepper device.

Refer to the Transaxial Probe (RA) Operator Manual.

Freeze an image of the organ to be measured. The probe should be


inserted to its most cephalic position (i.e. base of the prostate).

46-030370 REV 01 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-45


6-4-3 Stepper Volume
(continued)

Area Measurements for Each


Slice (Step Increment)
Make the first area measurement by one of three methods: two diameter,
trace or ellipse.

Two Diameter Method


DISPLAY

Press the DIST key.


Dist The LED on the DIST key lights. First cursor "+" appears on the display.


Use the TRACKBALL to move the cursor to the starting point of the first
T.B. diameter measurement.


Press SET to fix the first cursor position.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to move the cursor to the end point of the first
T.B. diameter measurement.


Press the MEAS key to record the first diameter measurement.
Meas


(continued)

Illustration 6-5
First Two Diameter Measurements GENERAL
ELECTRIC
11 / 05 / 92
09 : 59 : 27
RA 7MHz
x2.0
D+ 15
x 15 +
x
x x

G47D48T30
CAL2 1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 STVOL 4 AFI 5 HIP D=5.0mm GE

6-46 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 01


6-4-3 Stepper Volume

Area Measurements for Each


Slice (Step Increment)

Two Diameter Method


(continued)


Press the DIST key.
Dist
The LED on the DIST key lights. The second cursor "x" appears on the
display.


Use the TRACKBALL to move the cursor to the starting point of the second
T.B. diameter measurement.


Press SET to fix this cursor position.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to move a second cursor to the end point of the
T.B. second diameter measurement.


Press the MEAS key to record the second diameter measurement.
Meas

After the MEAS key is pressed for the second diameter, the area and
accumulative volume are calculated and displayed on the lower left side of
the display in the following format:

#XX = XX.X
VOL XXXX (with decimal point)

This represents the slice number that was just measured, the area of that
slice in square centimeters, and the accumulative volume in cubic centime-
ters.

After more than one slice has been measured, the current and previous
slice/areas/volumes will be displayed.

NOTE: If the image or the area measurement for this slice are unac-
ceptable, press OFF now. The slice measurement can be
repeated.

Unfreezing an image, without pressing OFF after the second


diameter measurement has been locked in by pressing MEAS,
permanently records the slice area and advances the slice
number. It is not possible to go back and redo a previous slice
measurement without restarting the entire stepper volume
sequence.

Unfreeze the image. Move the mechanical stepper to the next increment.
Repeat the two diameter area measurement steps for each necessary slice.

46-030370 REV 0
1 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-47
Illustration 6-6
Second Two Diameter GENERAL
Measurements ELECTRIC
011/ 05/ 92
09 : 26 : 26
RA 7MHz
x2.0
D+ 18
x 18 +
x
x
x

# 1= 1.8
VOL 0.60
# 2= 2.5
VOL 1.80

G47D48T30
CAL2 1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 STVOL 4 AFI 5 HIP D=5.0mm GE

6-4-3 Stepper Volume

Area Measurements for Each


Slice (Step Increment)

Two Diameter Method


(continued)
When all slice area measurements have been accomplished:

Press the ENTER key to complete the stepper volume function.


Enter

The accumulated volume calculation is displayed on the image monitor and


the internally stored stepper volume is reset to zero.

6-48 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 1


46-030370 REV 0
6-4-3 Stepper Volume
(continued)

Area Measurements for Each


Slice (Step Increment)

Trace Method

Press the TRACE/AREA key. The "+" cursor is displayed.


Trace
Area


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
T.B. point.


Press SET. The starting point cursor is locked and the "+" cursor changes
Set to a dot cursor.


Using the TRACKBALL, move the dot cursor to trace the organ to be
T.B. measured. The trace is displayed as a continuous curve.


When the trace is completed, press SET to fix the trace outline.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to move the cursor inside the boundary of the area
T.B. being measured.


Press the MEAS key to record the traced area measurement.
Meas
After the MEAS key is pressed, the area is calculated and displayed on the
lower left side of the display in the following format:

#XX = XX.X
VOL XXXX (with decimal point)

This represents the slice number that was just measured, the area of that slice
in square centimeters and the accumulative volume in cubic centimeters.

NOTE: If the image or the area measurement for this slice are unac-
ceptable, press OFF now. The slice measurement can be
repeated.

Unfreezing an image, without pressing OFF after the second


diameter measurement has been locked in by pressing MEAS,
permanently records the slice area and advances the slice
number. It is not possible to go back and redo a previous slice
measurement without restarting the entire stepper volume
sequence.

Unfreeze the image. Move the mechanical stepper to the next increment.
Repeat the trace/area measurement steps for each necessary slice.

46-030370 REV 1
0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-49
Illustration 6-7
First Trace/Area Measurement GENERAL
ELECTRIC
011/ 05/ 92
09 : 28 : 52
RA 7MHz
x2.0

+
C+ 51
x
x

A+ 1.72
x
x

# 1= 1.7
VOL 0.58

G35D48T30
CAL2 1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 STVOL 4 AFI 5 HIP D=5.0mm GE

Illustration 7-8
Second Trace/Area Measurement GENERAL
ELECTRIC
011/ 05/ 92
09 : 29 : 10
RA 7MHz
x2.0

+
C+ 41
x
x

A+ 1.08
x
x
# 1= 1.7
VOL 0.58
# 2= 1.1
VOL 1.17

G35D48T30
CAL2 1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 STVOL 4 AFI 5 HIP D=5.0mm GE

6-4-3 Stepper Volume

Area Measurements for Each


Slice (Step Increment)

Trace Method
(continued)
When all slice area measurements have been accomplished:

Press the ENTER key to complete the stepper volume function.


Enter

The accumulated volume calculation is displayed on the image monitor and


the internally stored stepper volume is reset to zero.

6-50 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 01


6-4-3 Stepper Volume
(continued)

Area Measurements for Each


Slice (Step Increment)

Ellipse Method

Trace
Press the DIST key, then press the TRACE/AREA key. Both the DIST and
Dist
Area TRACE/AREA LEDs will light and the highlighted cursor will
appear on the screen.

NOTE: Pressing the DIST or TRACE/AREA keys at any time before the
completion of this sequence will exit the ellipse mode and
remove any ellipse graphics from the display.


Use the TRACKBALL to position the cursor at one end of the trans-
T. B. verse axis of the ellipse.


Press SET. A second cursor will appear.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to position the highlighted "+" cursor to the opposite
T. B. end of the transverse axis.

▼ Press SET. The ellipse graphic will appear with a 1:1 Aspect Ratio (a circle).
Set

NOTE: The transverse diameter is between the two "+" cursors. The
AP diameter is between the two "x" cursors. The highlighted
"x" cursor is now active.


Use the TRACKBALL to position the highlighted "x" cursor to the upper end
T. B. of the AP axis.


Press SET. The highlighted "x" cursor is now active.
Set

(continued)

46-030370 REV 0
1 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-51
6-4-3 Stepper Volume

Area Measurements for Each


Slice (Step Increment)

Ellipse Method
(continued)


Use the TRACKBALL to position the highlighted "x" cursor to the lower end
T. B. of the AP axis.


Press SET. The original "+" cursor is now active.
Set

NOTE: Each time SET is pressed, the cursors become alternately


active. Adjustments to the ellipse may be made as desired.
The highlighted cursor is the active cursor.


When satisfied with the ellipse, press the MEAS key to record the first area
Meas measurement.

After the MEAS key is pressed, the area is calculated and displayed on the
lower left side of the display in the following format:

#XX = XX.X
VOL XXXX (with decimal point)

This represents the slice number that was just measured, the area of that
slice in square centimeters and the accumulative volume in cubic centime-
ters.

NOTE: If the image or the area measurement for this slice are unac-
ceptable, press OFF now. The slice measurement can be
repeated.

Unfreezing an image, without pressing OFF after the second


diameter measurement has been locked in by pressing MEAS,
permanently records the slice area and advances the slice
number. It is not possible to go back and redo a previous slice
measurement without restarting the entire stepper volume
sequence.

Unfreeze the image. Move the mechanical stepper to the next increment.
Repeat the ellipse area measurement steps for each necessary slice.

6-52 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 01


Illustration 6-9
First Ellipse Measurement GENERAL
ELECTRIC
11/ 05 / 92
09 : 20 : 57
RA 7MHz
x2.0
D+ 12
x 15 +
x x
x
C+ 43
x
x

A+ 1.45
x
x

# 1= 1.6
VOL 0.54

G35D48T30
CAL2 1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 STVOL 4 AFI 5 HIP D=5.0mm GE

Illustration 6-10
Second Ellipse Measurement GENERAL
ELECTRIC
11/ 05/ 92
09 : 35 : 27
RA 7MHz
x2.0
D+ 12
+
x 15 x
x
x
C+ 43
x +
x
A+ 1.45
x
x

# 1= 1.6
VOL 0.54
# 2= 1.5
VOL 1.27

G35D48T30
CAL2 1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 STVOL 4 AFI 5 HIP D=5.0mm GE

6-4-3 Stepper Volume

Area Measurements for Each


Slice (Step Increment)

Ellipse Method
(continued)

When all slice area measurements have been accomplished:

Press the ENTER key to complete the stepper volume function.


Enter

The accumulated volume calculation is displayed on the image monitor and


the internally stored stepper volume is reset to zero.

46-030370 REV 01 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-53


6-4-4 Amniotic Fluid
Index
For gestations of 20 weeks or more the Amniotic Fluid Index is determined
by taking a distance measurement of the amniotic fluid in each of the four
quadrants of the uterine cavity. These four measurements are added
together to calculate the Amniotic Fluid Index (AFI). As many as four
Amniotic Fluid Index calculations can be displayed.

DISPLAY

1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 STVOL 4 AFI


Calc 2


Use the ARROW keys to select AFI.
1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 STVOL 4 AFI


After freezing the image. Press the DIST key. The "+" ("x", "x", " X ") cursor
Dist
is displayed. ("x" is the second cursor, "x" is the third cursor, " X " is the fourth
cursor.)


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor ("x", "x", " X ") to the measure-
T.B. ment starting point.


Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point cursor "+", ("x", "x", " X ") will appear.
Set

▼ Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite end of
the measurement.
T.B.

▼ Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value. Unfreeze. Scan the
Meas patient. Freeze the image and make the second, third, and fourth quadrant
measurements.

▼ When all four quadrants have been measured and all four calipers appear
Enter on the screen, press ENTER. The AFI will be calculated and displayed on
the left side of the screen.

NOTE: Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE, or


PROBE to erase all measurement results.

To erase the Function Menu, press CALC 2 (LED will go out.)

See the following page for the procedure to calculate additional AFI
measurements.

6-54 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 01


6-4-4 Amniotic Fluid
Index (continued)
The following steps can be repeated to display as many as four AFI
calculations. If you want to check your work follow the procedure below to
calculate an additional AFI.

Press the OFF key. The distance measurements and cursors will be erased.
Off The previous AFI calculation(s) will remain.


After freezing the image. Press the DIST key. The "+" ("x", "x", " X ") cursor
Dist
is displayed. ("x" is the second cursor, "x" is the third cursor, " X " is the fourth
cursor.)


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor ("x", "x", " X ") to the measure-
T.B. ment starting point.

▼ Press SET to fix the cursor. An end-point cursor "+", ("x", "x", " X ") will appear.
Set

▼ Use the TRACKBALL to move the end-point cursor to the opposite end of
the measurement.
T.B.

▼ Press MEAS to fix the cursors and measure the value. Unfreeze. Scan the
Meas patient. Freeze the image and make the second, third, and fourth quadrant
measurements.

When all four quadrants have been measured, press ENTER. The AFI will
Enter be calculated and displayed on the left side of the screen.

NOTE: These steps can be repeated to display as many as four AFI


calculations. The most recent calculation displays below the
other results.

Press either ERASE twice, SCALE, NEW PATIENT, B-MODE, or


PROBE to erase all measurement results.

To erase the Function Menu, press CALC 1 (LED will go out).

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-55


6-4-4 Amniotic Fluid
Index (continued)
The Amniotic Fluid Index is determined by taking a distance measurement
of the amniotic fluid depth in each of four axial quadrants. These four
measurements are used together to formulate the Amniotic Fluid Index (AFI)

Normal values are considered to be:

Dr. Rutherford/Dr. Phelan, Obstetrics & Gynecology, Volume 70, No. 3, Part
1, p. 353-6, Sept. 1987.

36 - 40 weeks
0 - 5 cm = very low
5.1 - 8.0 cm = low
8.1 - 18.0 cm = normal
> 18.0 cm = high

Dr. C. C. Smith, The Female Patient, Volume 15, p. 85-97, March 1990.

28 - 40 weeks
15.0 cm = average
> 20.0 - 24.0 = hydramnios
< 5.0-6.0 = Oligohydramnios

6-56 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


6-5 Mapping
The system has ten types of curves that translate an image from memory
into a gray scale display.

To switch between Map Package A and Map Package B, use the CON-
TROL, N function. By pressing CONTROL, N, ENTER, the system will
switch from the current map package to the alternative package.

DISPLAY

Map N 1 2 3 4
Map


Transformation curve N is selected.

To erase the display press MAP (LED will go out). This setting is kept until
the power is turned off or a probe is changed. Mapping can be automatically
set up by using CONTROL, B function.

Illustration 6-11
Mapping Level N
Package A

LEVEL N
(Out)

(In)
L M H

Picture is transformed into a line on a gray scale.

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-57


6-5 Mapping (continued)

Illustration 6-12
Mapping Level 1
Package A

LEVEL 1
(H45)
(Out)

45%

(In)

L M H

The echo brightness in higher band is increased. The image becomes softer
and the edges are amplified (ideal for diagnosing soft tissue).

Illustration 6-13
Mapping Level 2
Package A

LEVEL 2
(H50)
(Out)

50%

(In)

L M H

The echo brightness in higher band is further increased. The image becomes
softer and the edges are amplified (ideal for diagnosing soft tissue).

6-58 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


6-5 Mapping (continued)

Illustration 6-14
Mapping Level 3
Package A

LEVEL 3
(M50)
(Out)

25%

50%

25%
(In)

L M H

The echo brightness in medium band is increased and shows higher


contrast. The image will become more clear (used for diagnosis of cavity
structures).

Illustration 6-15
Mapping Level 4
Package A

LEVEL 4
(M70)
(Out)
15%

70%

15%
(In)

L M H

The echo brightness in medium band is further increased and shows higher
contrast.

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-59


6-5 Mapping (continued)

Illustration 6-16
Mapping Level N
Package B

LEVEL N

(Out)

(In)

L M H

Illustration 6-17
Mapping Level 1
Package B

LEVEL1

50%

L M H

6-60 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


6-5 Mapping (continued)

Illustration 6-18
Mapping Level 2
Package B

LEVEL 2

100%

40%

L M H

Illustration 6-19
Mapping Level 3
Package B

LEVEL 3

100%

30%

L M H

46-030370 REV 0 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 6-61


6-5 Mapping (continued)

Illustration 6-20
Mapping Level 4
Package B

LEVEL 4

100%

25%

L M H

6-62 FUNCTION KEY SELECTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


SECTION 7

UROLOGY OPTIONS

Overview

Basic Urology Measurements

7.0 MHz Transaxial Probe

Mechanical Stepper/Needle Placement Guide

Stepper Volume Calculation

46-030370 REV 3 UROLOGY OPTIONS 7-1


This page intentionally left blank.

7-2 UROLOGY OPTIONS 46-030370 REV 3


SECTION 7
UROLOGY OPTIONS

7-1 Overview
This section provides information on additional urology capabilities. The
Stepper Volume calculation allows for area measurements to be taken at
fixed increments. The mechanical stepping device is used to hold the probe
in a fixed position; it moves at fixed intervals to ensure that each area
measurement taken is equally spaced. The 7 MHz Transaxial (RA) Probe
complements the mechanical stepper.

7-2 Basic Urology


Measurements Refer to Section 6-3-2 (the volume portion of Calc 1) for specific steps to take
in performing Urology volume measurements.

7-3 7.0 MHz Transaxial


Probe

7-3-1 Description
The optional 7.0 MHz Transaxial (RA) Probe is a micro-convex probe for
transaxial prostate scanning.

7-3-2 Parts List


The optional Transaxial (RA) Probe Kit (H4061RA) contents:

1 46-285613G1 RA Probe and cable (Refer to Illustration 7-1)


1 46-030123 RA Probe Operator Manual

Options:

E8386CD Sanitary Inner Probe Cover (Box of 24)


E8386CE Finger Cot Sterile Sheath and Bands (Box of 100)
E8385CC Sanitary Outer Probe Cover (Box of 20)

NOTE: Recommended use with volume stepper device. See Illustra-


tion 7-2. Recommended needle size is 18 gauge x 20 cm.

46-030370 REV 3 UROLOGY OPTIONS 7-3


Illustration 7-1
RA Probe

22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4

7-3-3 RA Probe Factory


Presets
The following RT 3200 Advantage - I system parameters will be preset to the
values indicated when the RA Probe is selected:

Image Invert ON
Image Reverse OFF
Scale Depth X2.0 (7.5cm)
Gain 47 db
Dynamic Range 48 db
Focus 3

7-3-4 RA Probe
Preparation
1. Remove the probe from the box and carefully examine it for any
damage.

2. Clean and then disinfect/sterilize the RA Probe. (See Appendix C)

3. Inspect a sterile/sanitary sheath. Place a small amount of ultrasound gel


inside the sheath tip (the gel is between the sheath inner surface and the
probe aperture).

4. Place the sheath tip over the probe aperture and then pull the sheath
end toward the probe handle.

5. Place a rubberband/twist lock over the sheath at the end of the probe
shaft. Ensure the rubberband/twist lock is tight around the sheath. Rub
your finger over the tip of the probe to ensure all air bubbles have been
eliminated.

6. Place a small amount of mineral oil/ultrasound gel on the gel-filled


sheath tip outer surface.

NOTE: Remember to rinse all probe sheaths of powder before placing


on the probe. Powder can degrade the scan image displayed.

7-4 UROLOGY OPTIONS 46-030370 REV 3


7-3-5 Transrectal
Scanning—with
Water Path
(OPTIONAL)
1. Remove the probe from the box and carefully examine it for any
damage.

2. Clean and then disinfect/sterilize the RA Probe. (See Appendix C)

3. Fill the syringe with 60cc of degassed water.

4. Attach tubing to the syringe and remove the air bubbles.

5. Inspect a sterile/sanitary inner sheath (finger cot). Put inner sterile


sheath (finger cot) on the probe and secure it tightly with a rubberband.
Double looping of the rubberband is suggested.

6. Attach the tubing to the probe and inject 30cc of water.

7. Tilt the probe and withdraw water, forcing the air bubbles out first.
Repeat as necessary to remove all air bubbles.

8. Inspect a sterile/sanitary outer sheath. Put a small amount of gel into


the outer sterile sheath.

9. Place the sheath tip over the probe aperture and pull the sheath end
down toward the probe handle.

7-3-6 Use of RA Probe


with Volume
Stepper Device
The 7 MHz Transaxial (RA) Probe is designed to be used with mechanical
stepping device and needle placement guide shown in Illustration 7-2. The
needle placement guide matches the electronic needle placement grid
displayed on the RT 3200 Advantage - I. When used with the stepper
volume calculation option, a "stack-of-coins" method can be used to
calculate the volume of the prostate gland.

NOTE: This product is compatible only with needles of 20 cm in length


and 16 to 20 gauge.

46-030370 REV 3 UROLOGY OPTIONS 7-5


7-3-6 Use of RA Probe
with Volume
Stepper Device
(continued)
A typical exam consists of:

• Placing the patient in the supine position.


• Carefully inserting a properly prepared RA probe and orient it to scan the
prostate at its most cephalic position.
• Position the mechanical stepping device and secure the RA probe to the
stepper. If the needle placement guide is to be used in the exam,
carefully align the probe to the needle placement guide registration line.
• Make as many stepper volume measurements as necessary to calcu-
late the volume of the prostate.
• Retract the probe (utilizing the stepper device) the necessary step
between each incremental slice of the gland.
• Once the complete gland has been evaluated detach the probe from the
mechanical stepper and carefully remove it from the patient.

This calculated information can be used for future procedures, if necessary.

Illustration 7-2
RA Probe with Volume Stepper
Device Needle Placement Guide Template

RA Probe

22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4

90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10

MFG. FOR
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
MODEL H4500TB
S. N. 125

Mechanical Stepper Device

Universal Table Mount

NOTE: Sterile/sanitary sheaths are to be used on the probe during its


actual use with patients.

7-6 UROLOGY OPTIONS 46-030370 REV 3


7-3-7 System
Preparation
1. Connect the RA probe connector to the console in either probe position.

RA probe identification shows on the image screen "RA 7.0 MHz" and
the image is displayed.

2. If needed, press CONTROL, L, 1 then press ENTER. The needle


placement grid will be displayed. The image display MUST be inverted
and the scale size set to x1.5 or x2.0 to display the needle placement
grid.

3. Set the console for recommended optimum imaging. (This may be


different than the machine default settings.)

Scale - X2.0 Focus - 2-3


Image Direction - RVS -(OFF) Image Invert - ON

NOTE: With the image invert key ON, the image direction key (RVS)
should be OFF for proper orientation.

7-3-8 Infection Control


Users of this product have an obligation and responsibility to provide the
highest degree of infection control possible to patients, co-workers and
themselves.

To avoid cross contamination, follow all infection control policies established


for your office, department or hospital as they apply to personnel and
equipment.

7-3-9 Patient
Preparation for
Transrectal
Imaging
1. Prepare the patient. An enema is recommended one hour before the
exam.

2. Transaxial imaging is best performed with the patient in the supine


position.

46-030370 REV 3 UROLOGY OPTIONS 7-7


Illustration 7-3
Ultrasound Gel Placement

Gel

Sterile
Sheath

Place a small amount of


ultrasound gel inside the
sterile/sanitary sheath

Carefully handle the Transaxial (RA) Probe. Dropping, mishandling, or


CAUTION
knocking the probe or lens against any object can damage it. Protect
the lens (aperture) from any sharp object.

Illustration 7-4
Sterile/Sanitary Sheath Placement

Optional Finger Cot


for Water Path Sterile/Sanitary Outer Sheath Twist lock

4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22

Optional Finger Cot


Rubberband for Water Optional Water Path Inlet
Path

7-8 UROLOGY OPTIONS 46-030370 REV 3


7-3-10 Patient Scan
1. Scan the patient. The probe handle orientation mark indicates the image
scan plane. Be sure that the Image Reverse function is OFF.

2. If necessary, rotate, retract, or advance the probe to see all pertinent


anatomy.

3. When the probe is in position, attach it to the mechanical stepping


device.

Steps for attaching probe to stepper:

a. Place the probe into clamp.


b. Tighten the probe clamp.
c. Attach the needle placement guide.
d. Align the probe to the needle placement guide.

CAUTION Ensure that the arrow at the bottom center of the Needle Placement
Guide accurately aligns to the center line marked on the probe shaft.

Failure to do so will cause needle placement not to match the ultra-


sound display.

4. If a needle placement is to be performed, display the needle placement


grid on the image screen by:

a. Ensuring that the Image Reverse function is OFF and the Image
Invert function is ON.

b. Pressing the CONTROL, L, 1, and ENTER keys. The needle


placement grid will be displayed.

c. Select the desired scale factor and focus.

To turn the needle placement grid display OFF, press the CONTROL,
L, 1, and ENTER keys again. The needle placement grid will be erased
(the image display will not be affected).

CAUTION Before needle insertion, scan the patient to determine the correct
puncture depth and site.

Only the sterile/sanitary sheath, rubberband or twist lock and finger


cot with rubberband are on the RA probe during the pre-needle
placement scanning.

46-030370 REV 3 UROLOGY OPTIONS 7-9


7-3-10 Patient Scan
(continued)
5. When the examination is over:

a. Carefully remove the probe.

b. Remove the twist lock. Remove and discard the sheath.

c. Thoroughly clean the probe and equipment. Refer to your institution's


infection control guidelines for disinfection/sterilization protocols.
See Appendix C for cleaning and sterilization instructions. Return
the probe to its box.

7-10 UROLOGY OPTIONS 46-030370 REV 3


Illustration 7-5
RA Probe Needle Placement Anterior
Grid Display
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
11/ 05 / 92
09 : 40 : 23
RA 7MHz 12 + . + . + . + . + . + . +
x2.0
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 + . + . + . + . + . + . +
9 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 + . + . + . + . + . + . +
7 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Left
6 + . + . + . + . + . + . +
5 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 + . + . + . + . + . + . +
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 + . + . + . + . + . + . +
1 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0 + . + . + . + . + . + . +
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
G35D48T40
GE
Posterior

NOTE: The Image Reverse Function is "OFF". Image Invert Function


is "ON".

Illustration 7-6
Scan Plane Orientation— Anterior
Sagittal View

Right Left

Posterior

46-030370 REV 3 UROLOGY OPTIONS 7-11


Illustration 7-7
Transrectal Image Orientation—
Axial View


Scan Plane
Anterior

B C

4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22

Posterior

Illustration 7-8
Transrectal Image Orientation—
Screen Display
Anterior

04 / 14 / 92
13 : 59 : 27
RA 7MHz
x2.0

Right Left

G19D54T30
GE
Posterior

7-12 UROLOGY OPTIONS 46-030370 REV 3


7-3 Mechanical Stepper/
Needle Placement
Guide
This mechanical stepping device is intended to be used only with the RT
3200 Advantage - I (with the Urology Options Upgrade - H4500TA) and the
7 MHz Transaxial (RA) Probe (H4061RA).

7-3-1 Parts
Identification
The H4500TB Mechanical Stepping Device Kit consists of the following:

1 46-285614P1 Probe Holder and Stepping Mechanism


1 46-286615P1 Needle Placement Guide Template
1 46-285616P1 Universal Table Mounting System
1 46-030124 Needle Placement Guide/Stepper Operator Manual

The variable position mechanical stepping device is used to hold the 7 MHz
Transaxial (RA) Probe, lock the probe in place and move the probe in small
increments throughout an organ in cross-sectional slice (see Illustra-
tion 7-9). Used with the RT 3200 Advantage - I Stepper Volume Calculation,
a complete 3 dimensional volume calculation can be made of an organ.

Illustration 7-9
Probe Holder and Stepping
Mechanism 46-285614P1

02 22

-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

46-030370 REV 0 UROLOGY OPTIONS 7-13


7-3-1 Parts
Identification
(continued)
The needle placement guide template matches the RT 3200 Advantage - I
electronic needle placement grid for the 7 MHz Transaxial (RA) Probe to aid
in needle placement (see Illustration 7-10).

Illustration 7-10
Needle Placement Guide
46-286615P1 A B C D E F G H I J K L M
12 12
11 11
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
0 0
A B C D E I J K L M

The universal table mounting system holds the stepper and is compatible
with most radiology and urologic tables (see Illustration 7-11).

Illustration 7-11
Universal Table Mounting System
46-285616P1

7-14 UROLOGY OPTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


7-3-2 Control/
Adjustment
Description
See Illustrations 7-12 and 7-13 for the location and brief description of the
parts for the Mechanical Stepper.

Illustration 7-12
Assembled Parts with 7MHz
Transaxial Probe
Right Side View

Needle Placement Guide Template

Adjustable Slide Marker—


sets reference point for
stepper movement
7.0 MHz Transaxial Probe

22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4

90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10

MFG. FOR
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
MODEL H4500TB
S. N. 125
Mounting Bar Locking Needle Placement
Knob—locks stepper to Guide Locking Knob—
mounting bar locks guide to probe

Mounting Bar

Universal Table Universal Table Mount


Mount Clamp Adjusting Knobs—
Locking Lever— adjusts distance from
course angle adjust- stepper unit to table mount
ment of mounting bar Mounting Bar Locking
and stepper unit Knob—adjusts height
Universal
Table Mount of stepper unit
Clamp

46-030370 REV 0 UROLOGY OPTIONS 7-15


Illustration 7-13
Assembled Parts with 7MHz
Transaxial Probe
Left Side View

Needle Placement Guide Template

7.0 MHz Transaxial Probe


Probe Cradle Clamp
Locking Knob—locks
Probe Cradle Clamp probe to stepper unit

4 6 8 10 21 14 16 18 02 22

-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Stepper
Advance/
Retract
Knob
Needle Placement Probe Cradle
Guide Locking Knob— Tension Adjustment—
locks guide to probe adjusts stepper movement Stepper Angle
tension Adjustment
Knob—locks
stepper angle
position (fine
adjustment)

Universal Table
Mount Clamp
Universal Table Mount Locking Lever—
Adjusting Knobs— course angle adjust-
adjusts distance from ment of mounting bar
stepper unit to table mount and stepper unit

7-16 UROLOGY OPTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


7-3-3 Alternate
Assembly
Standard assembly is as shown in Illustration 7-12 and 7-13. The Needle
Placement Guide need only be attached to the probe if needle guidance is
required in the study.

The Mechanical Stepper is factory assembled to move in 5mm increments.


By removing the upper half of the stepper assembly (Illustration 7-14) and
reversing its attachment to the lower half (Illustration 7-15), the stepper will
move in 2.5mm increments.

CAUTION Standard stepper increment movement is 5.0mm. Assembly for


2.5mm increment movement is available as an option. Therefore it is
necessary to match the stepper movement to the ultrasound system
software. Failure to accurately match the mechanical stepper incre-
ment to the ultrasound system stepper spacing will result in improper
volume calculations.

Illustration 7-14
Probe Holder Removal

22 20

90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10

MFG. FOR
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
MODEL H4500TB
S. N. 125

Illustration 7-15
Assembly for 2.5mm Stepping

02 22

-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

MFG. FOR
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
MODEL H4500TB
S. N. 125

46-030370 REV 0 UROLOGY OPTIONS 7-17


7-3-3 Alternate
Assembly
(continued)
The CONTROL, T function changes the step increment or re-selects the
present step increment which will cause the current volume and slice
number to be cleared. The next area measurement will then be interpreted
as the first slice of a new volume.

DISPLAY

CONTROL:____
Control LED on Control key lights.


CONTROL: T ____
T


? Press the "2" or "5" key for the desired step increment spacing registration.
2 5
"2" for 2.5 mm spacing for area measurements.
"5" for 5.0 mm spacing for area measurements.


Press ENTER to complete and store the increment spacing selection.
Enter

This selection will remain stored in the system memory until it is changed by
the Control, T function again.

7-18 UROLOGY OPTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


7-3-4 Lithotomy
(Stirrup) Table
Mounting
The Stepper Mounting Bar can be repositioned to extend horizontally from
the stepper body (See Illustration 7-16). This allows the stepper to be
mounted to common Lithotomy (Stirrup) Tables if the Universal Table Mount
is not used.

Illustration 7-16
Mounting Bar Repositioning
View 1
22
20
18
90
80 16
70
60 14
50
40 12
30 10
20
10 8
0 -10 6
4

MFG
GE MED. FOR
ICA
MODEL L SYSTEMS
H45
S. N. 125 00TB

View 2

46-030370 REV 0 UROLOGY OPTIONS 7-19


7-3-5 Typical Use
The stepping device is utilized to accurately calculate an organ's volume by
stepping through the organ in 5mm increments. This is also available in
2.5mm increments. (Refer to Illustrations 7-14 and 7-15). The device is
most commonly used to calculate prostate volume for seed implant therapy.
Volume is used in the pre-planning for seed placement and also utilized
during the surgical procedure to guide the user in the placement of the
seeds.

Stepper/Probe Attachment

• Turn the advance/retract knob to place the stepper in its fully retracted
position.

• Set the slide marker towards the rear of the stepper as a reference.

• Advance the stepper. (Use the slide marker as a reference. Each mark
equals 5.0mm.)

• Place the stepper and mounting bar into the universal table mount
clamp. Make a course adjustment to align it with the patient. Tighten
the mounting bar locking knob and universal table mount locking knob.

• Gently insert the properly prepared 7.0 MHz transaxial probe into the
patient. (Refer to the Transaxial Probe (RA) Operator Manual for probe
preparation.)

• If needed, attach the needle placement guide template. Secure the


needle placement guide to the transaxial probe.


• Be sure to align the probe center line with the mark on the needle
placement guide as shown in Illustration 7-17.

• Place the probe cradle clamp over the transaxial probe and partially
tighten the clamp locking knob.

• Position the probe to find the cephalic position of the gland.

• If necessary, adjust the probe/stepper position by using the:

¤ Universal table mount clamp locking knob


¤ Mounting bar locking knob
¤ Stepper angle adjusting knob
¤ Universal table mount adjusting knobs

7-20 UROLOGY OPTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


7-3-5 Typical Use
(continued)

NOTE: Ensure that the alignment marks on the probe shaft and needle
placement guide are still in alignment. This ensures that the
needle guide aligns with the system electronic grid. Failure to
align the needle placement guide arrow marker with the probe
shaft center line will cause inaccurate needle placement.

Illustration 7-17
Probe Shaft and Needle Placement
Guide Alignment
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
12 12
11 11
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
0 0
A B C D E I J K L M

C D E I J K

12
12

14
14

6
1

• Once the probe is in position and properly aligned, tightly secure the
probe to the stepper with the probe cradle clamp locking knob.

• Set the slide marker to a reference mark near the back of the stepper
mechanism.

7-3-6 Periodic
Maintenance
Inspect the following before each use:

• Needle placement guide for cleanliness and damage.


• Universal table mount for cleanliness.
• Stepper ratchet mechanism for smooth operation. (no binding)
• Check the hardware for burrs and sharp edges.

46-030370 REV 0 UROLOGY OPTIONS 7-21


7-3-7 Cleaning and
Sterilization

Infection Control
Users of this product have an obligation and responsibility to provide the
highest degree of infection control possible to patients, co-workers and
themselves.

To avoid cross contamination, follow all infection control policies established


for your office, department or hospital as they apply to personnel and
equipment.

Cleaning
• Wash the stepper, needle placement guide and universal table mount
with warm, mild, non-abrasive strong detergent solution below 26°C
(80°F).

• Use a cleaning brush provided to clean the holes in the needle


placement guide.

• Once all parts are clean, rinse with clear fresh water and dry all parts
thoroughly.

Disinfection/Sterilization
• Disinfect or sterilize in a suitable glutaraldehyde based solution, without
surfactants using the manufacturer's instructions and recommenda-
tions for concentration and time of contact.

A typical disinfection soak time is 10 minutes.


A typical sterilization soak time is 10 hours.

• Rinse thoroughly in sterile distilled water for 15 minutes and wrap in


surgical wrap to maintain a disinfected/sterile environment.

Autoclaving or gas sterilization of any kind is not recommended.

7-3-8 Replacement
Parts
Replacement parts can be obtained through GE Medical Systems Accesso-
ries, by calling 1-800-472-3666 or GE Medical Direct Customer Order
Service at 1-800-558-2040.

Available parts are:

• 46-285614P1 Mechanical Stepper Mechanism with Mounting Bar


• H4500TT Needle Placement Guide Template
• 46-285616P1 Universal Table Mount with Clamp
• 46-285619G1 Cleaning Kit
• E8323GD Cleaning Brushes for Template (H4500TT)

7-22 UROLOGY OPTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


7-4 Stepper Volume
Calculation

7-4-1 Stepper Volume


Formula
Stepper Volume (STVOL) is the method used to calculate the volume of an
organ using the RT 3200 Advantage - I Urology software, Transaxial Probe
and a mechanical stepping device that moves the probe in fixed increments.
The calculation is based on the fact that each step or area measurement is
taken at equal stepper increments. The area measured at each slice is then
used to compute the total volume of the organ, according to the following
model:

For N slices, there are N-1 volumes between the slices plus a small volume
at each end.

It is assumed that the small volumes of the end caps are cones with a base
equal to the measured area of the end slice and height equal to the slice
spacing. The cones will have volumes V=A1d/3 and V=ANd/3 for slices 1 and
N respectively, where d is the spacing between the slices.

The volumes between the slices are assumed to be segments of a


paraboloid of revolution, where the volume between any slice n and n+1 is
(An+An+1)d/2.

The sum of the volumes between slices is:


A1+A2 A2+A3 AN-1+An
V=d [ ( 2 )+( 2 )+...+( 2 )]

Therefore, the total volume of the organ is calculated as:


5 5
V=d [ ( 6 )A1+A2+A3+...+AN-1+( 6 )AN]

Illustration 7-18
Scan Plane Orientation
of the Prostate

10
12

14
16

18

20

22

46-030370 REV 0 UROLOGY OPTIONS 7-23


7-4-2 Basic Principles
of Operation
The stepper volume measurement works ONLY in B-Mode. Stepper
volumes are not accumulated in either B/M- or M-Mode. Stepper Volume
will only be functional with the RA Probe attached.

A stepper volume measurement begins when the first area measurement is


made while the system is in the CALC 2, Menu Level 3 STVOL (stepper
volume) function.

The volume measurement ends when the ENTER key is pressed while at
CALC 2, Menu Level 3 (STVOL). If ENTER is pressed while in B/M- or
M-Mode, the keystroke is ignored and the system emits a beep.

During the measurement operation, pressing the ENTER key resets the
internal memory to enable a new volume measurement to begin and
displays the completed volume on the lower left side of the image display
under the last accumulated volume calculation.

The CONTROL, T function changes the step increment or reselects the


present step increment which will cause the current volume and slice
number to be cleared. The next area measurement will then be interpreted
as the first slice of a new volume.

The OFF key is used to reject a slice area measurement. When the OFF key
is pressed:

• The measurement graphics are erased.


• The slice #, area and volume in the scrolling area (lower left portion of
the display) remain the same.
• The current slice number and area are reset, but all previous measure-
ments are retained.
• The rejected slice data remains on the screen. It will be scrolled up when
the slice measurement is repeated.

The measurement can now be repeated on the frozen image or unfreeze


and change the parameters. Refreeze the image and repeat the slice
measurement on the new image.
After the measurement has been repeated, the old data will be scrolled up
and the same slice # with the new data will be displayed in the scrolling area.
If OFF is pressed followed by ENTER, the volume is equal to the accumu-
lated volume of the last accepted slice.

Once the image is unfrozen, the slice area is calculated from the measure-
ment and a new measurement for that increment (slice) can NOT be made.

7-24 UROLOGY OPTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


7-4-2 Basic Principles
of Operation
(continued)
Unfreezing the image after a measurement has been made, without
pressing OFF, is a sign that the measurement has been accepted. The
system calculates the slice area and advances to the next slice for a
measurement.

The last four (4) lines of this scrolling area of the image display will then
read:
#1 = XX.X Slice # & Area
VOL XXXX Accumulative Volume
#2 = XX.X Slice # & Area
VOL XXXX Accumulative Volume

The volume is in cubic centimeters and includes a decimal point, as


displayed for the current CALC 1 VOL calculation.

The internal parameters relevant to the stepper volume measurement are


at three levels: the current slice number/area measurement, the last slice
number/area/volume, and the volume data displayed on the left side of the
image monitor. These parameters are reset as outlined in Table 7-1.
Table 7-1
Measurement Parameter Resets
Current slice #, area Last slice #, Monitor
Function under measurement area, volume Display
NEW PATIENT or
power-up RESET RESET RESET
CONTROL, T, 2 or
CONTROL, T, 5 RESET RESET HOLD
OFF, B/M-MODE,
PROBE or SCALE RESET HOLD HOLD

7-4-3 Stepper Volume


Increment
Selection
Before the stepper volume calculation can be made, ensure that the
mechanical stepper increment used matches the ultrasound system step-
per spacing selection.

CAUTION Standard stepper increment movement is 5.0mm. The stepper can be


reconfigured to move in 2.5mm increments. Therefore it is necessary
to match the stepper movement to the ultrasound system software.
Failure to accurately match the mechanical stepper increment to the
ultrasound system stepper spacing will result in improper volume
calculations.

46-030370 REV 0 UROLOGY OPTIONS 7-25


7-4-3 Stepper Volume
Increment
Selection
(continued)

DISPLAY

CONTROL: ____
Control LED on Control key lights.


CONTROL: T ____
T


? Press the "2" or "5" key for the desired step increment spacing registration.
2 5
"2" for 2.5 mm spacing for area measurements.
"5" for 5.0 mm spacing for area measurements.


Press the ENTER key to complete and store the increment spacing
Enter selection.

This selection will remain stored in the system memory until it is changed by
the Control, T function again.

The CONTROL, T function changes the step increment or re-selects the


present step increment which will cause the current volume and slice
number to be cleared. The next area measurement will then be interpreted
as the first slice of a new volume.

7-4-4 Scan Preparation


Select the Stepper Volume measurement by performing the following steps:

DISPLAY

1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 STVOL 4 AFI 5 HIP


Calc 2


Use the ARROW keys to select Menu Level 3, STVOL.

1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 STVOL 4 AFI 5 HIP

7-26 UROLOGY OPTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


7-4-4 Scan Preparation
(continued)

NOTE: While in CALC 2, Menu Level 3 (STVOL), the system slice


increment spacing is displayed in the menu help area to the left
of the GE logo.

It will read :
D = 2.5mm if 2.5 mm increments were selected
D = 5.0mm if 5.0 mm increments were selected

See Illustration 7-19.

CAUTION Ensure that the system selection matches the mechanical stepper
increments to be used.

Illustration 7-19
Stepper Increment Selection
Display

04 / 14 / 92
13 : 59 : 27
RA 7MHz
x2.0

G19D54T30 D=5.0mm
GE

System Stepper Increment Selection

Position the patient as required for the study indicated.

Insert the probe to the first scan location and secure it to the mechanical
stepper device.

Refer to the Transaxial Probe (RA) Operator Manual.

Freeze an image of the organ to be measured. The probe should be


inserted to its most cephalic position (i.e. base of the prostate).

46-030370 REV 0 UROLOGY OPTIONS 7-27


7-4-5 Area
Measurements
for Each Slice
(Step Increment)
Make the first area measurement by one of three methods: two diameter,
trace or ellipse.

Two Diameter Method


DISPLAY

Press the DIST key.


Dist The LED on the DIST key lights. First cursor "+" appears on the display.


Use the TRACKBALL to move the cursor to the starting point of the first
T.B. diameter measurement.


Press SET to fix the first cursor position.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to move the cursor to the end point of the first
T.B. diameter measurement.


Press the MEAS key to record the first diameter measurement.
Meas


(continued)

Illustration 7-20
First Two Diameter
Measurements GENERAL
ELECTRIC
11 / 05 / 92
09 : 59 : 27
RA 7MHz
x2.0
D+ 15
x 15 +
x
x x

G47D48T30
CAL2 1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 STVOL 4 AFI 5 HIP D=5.0mm GE

7-28 UROLOGY OPTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


7-4-5 Area
Measurements
for Each Slice

Two Diameter Method


(continued)


Press the DIST key.
Dist
The LED on the DIST key lights. The second cursor "x" appears on the
display.


Use the TRACKBALL to move the cursor to the starting point of the second
T.B. diameter measurement.


Press SET to fix this cursor position.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to move a second cursor to the end point of the
T.B. second diameter measurement.


Press the MEAS key to record the second diameter measurement.
Meas

After the MEAS key is pressed for the second diameter, the area and
accumulative volume are calculated and displayed on the lower left side of
the display in the following format:

#XX = XX.X
VOL XXXX (with decimal point)

This represents the slice number that was just measured, the area of that
slice in square centimeters, and the accumulative volume in cubic centime-
ters.

After more than one slice has been measured, the current and previous
slice/areas/volumes will be displayed.

NOTE: If the image or the area measurement for this slice are
unacceptable, press OFF now. The slice measurement can be
repeated.

Unfreezing an image, without pressing OFF after the second


diameter measurement has been locked in by pressing MEAS,
permanently records the slice area and advances the slice
number. It is not possible to go back and redo a previous slice
measurement without restarting the entire stepper volume
sequence.

Unfreeze the image. Move the mechanical stepper to the next increment.
Repeat the two diameter area measurement steps for each necessary slice.

46-030370 REV 0 UROLOGY OPTIONS 7-29


Illustration 7-21
Second Two Diameter GENERAL
Measurements ELECTRIC
011/ 05/ 92
09 : 26 : 26
RA 7MHz
x2.0
D+ 18
x 18 +
x
x
x

# 1= 1.8
VOL 0.60
# 2= 2.5
VOL 1.80

G47D48T30
CAL2 1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 STVOL 4 AFI 5 HIP D=5.0mm GE

7-4-5 Area
Measurements
for Each Slice

Two Diameter Method


(continued)
When all slice area measurements have been accomplished:

Press the ENTER key to complete the stepper volume function.


Enter

The accumulated volume calculation is displayed on the image monitor and


the internally stored stepper volume is reset to zero.

7-30 UROLOGY OPTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


7-4-5 Area
Measurements
for Each Slice
(continued)

Trace Method
Press the TRACE/AREA key. The "+" cursor is displayed.
Trace
Area


Use the TRACKBALL to move the "+" cursor to the measurement starting
T.B. point.


Press SET. The starting point cursor is locked and the "+" cursor changes
Set to a dot cursor.


Using the TRACKBALL, move the dot cursor to trace the organ to be
T.B. measured. The trace is displayed as a continuous curve.


When the trace is completed, press SET to fix the trace outline.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to move the cursor inside the boundary of the area
T.B. being measured.


Press the MEAS key to record the traced area measurement.
Meas
After the MEAS key is pressed, the area is calculated and displayed on the
lower left side of the display in the following format:

#XX = XX.X
VOL XXXX (with decimal point)

This represents the slice number that was just measured, the area of that
slice in square centimeters and the accumulative volume in cubic centime-
ters.

NOTE: If the image or the area measurement for this slice are
unacceptable, press OFF now. The slice measurement can be
repeated.

Unfreezing an image, without pressing OFF after the second


diameter measurement has been locked in by pressing MEAS,
permanently records the slice area and advances the slice
number. It is not possible to go back and redo a previous slice
measurement without restarting the entire stepper volume
sequence.

Unfreeze the image. Move the mechanical stepper to the next increment.
Repeat the trace/area measurement steps for each necessary slice.

46-030370 REV 0 UROLOGY OPTIONS 7-31


Illustration 7-22
First Trace/Area Measurement GENERAL
ELECTRIC
011/ 05/ 92
09 : 28 : 52
RA 7MHz
x2.0

+
C+ 51
x
x

A+ 1.72
x
x

# 1= 1.7
VOL 0.58

G35D48T30
CAL2 1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 STVOL 4 AFI 5 HIP D=5.0mm GE

Illustration 7-23
Second Trace/Area Measurement GENERAL
ELECTRIC
011/ 05/ 92
09 : 29 : 10
RA 7MHz
x2.0

+
C+ 41
x
x

A+ 1.08
x
x
# 1= 1.7
VOL 0.58
# 2= 1.1
VOL 1.17

G35D48T30
CAL2 1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 STVOL 4 AFI 5 HIP D=5.0mm GE

7-4-5 Area
Measurements
for Each Slice

Trace Method (continued)


When all slice area measurements have been accomplished:

Press the ENTER key to complete the stepper volume function.


Enter

The accumulated volume calculation is displayed on the image monitor and


the internally stored stepper volume is reset to zero.

7-32 UROLOGY OPTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


7-4-5 Area
Measurements
for Each Slice
(continued)

Ellipse Method

Trace
Press the DIST key, then press the TRACE/AREA key. Both the DIST and
Dist
Area TRACE/AREA LEDs will light and the highlighted cursor will appear on
the screen.

NOTE: Pressing the DIST or TRACE/AREA keys at any time before the
completion of this sequence will exit the ellipse mode and
remove any ellipse graphics from the display.


Use the TRACKBALL to position the cursor at one end of the trans-
T. B. verse axis of the ellipse.


Press SET. A second cursor will appear.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to position the highlighted "+" cursor to the opposite
T. B. end of the transverse axis.

▼ Press SET. The ellipse graphic will appear with a 1:1 Aspect Ratio (a circle).
Set

NOTE: The transverse diameter is between the two "+" cursors. The
AP diameter is between the two "x" cursors. The highlighted
"x" cursor is now active.


Use the TRACKBALL to position the highlighted "x" cursor to the upper end
T. B. of the AP axis.

▼ Press SET. The highlighted "x" cursor is now active.


Set

(continued)

46-030370 REV 0 UROLOGY OPTIONS 7-33


7-4-5 Area
Measurements
for Each Slice

Ellipse Method
(continued)


Use the TRACKBALL to position the highlighted "x" cursor to the lower end
T. B. of the AP axis.


Press SET. The original "+" cursor is now active.
Set

NOTE: Each time SET is pressed, the cursors become alternately


active. Adjustments to the ellipse may be made as desired.
The highlighted cursor is the active cursor.


When satisfied with the ellipse, press the MEAS key to record the first area
Meas measurement.

After the MEAS key is pressed, the area is calculated and displayed on the
lower left side of the display in the following format:

#XX = XX.X
VOL XXXX (with decimal point)

This represents the slice number that was just measured, the area of that
slice in square centimeters and the accumulative volume in cubic centime-
ters.

NOTE: If the image or the area measurement for this slice are
unacceptable, press OFF now. The slice measurement can be
repeated.

Unfreezing an image, without pressing OFF after the second


diameter measurement has been locked in by pressing MEAS,
permanently records the slice area and advances the slice
number. It is not possible to go back and redo a previous slice
measurement without restarting the entire stepper volume
sequence.

Unfreeze the image. Move the mechanical stepper to the next increment.
Repeat the ellipse area measurement steps for each necessary slice.

7-34 UROLOGY OPTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


Illustration 7-24
First Ellipse Measurement GENERAL
ELECTRIC
11/ 05 / 92
09 : 20 : 57
RA 7MHz
x2.0
D+ 12
x 15 +
x x
x
C+ 43
x
x

A+ 1.45
x
x

# 1= 1.6
VOL 0.54

G35D48T30
CAL2 1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 STVOL 4 AFI 5 HIP D=5.0mm GE

Illustration 7-25
Second Ellipse Measurement GENERAL
ELECTRIC
11/ 05/ 92
09 : 35 : 27
RA 7MHz
x2.0
D+ 12
+
x 15 x
x
x
C+ 43
x +
x
A+ 1.45
x
x

# 1= 1.6
VOL 0.54
# 2= 1.5
VOL 1.27

G35D48T30
CAL2 1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 STVOL 4 AFI 5 HIP D=5.0mm GE

7-4-5 Area
Measurements
for Each Slice

Ellipse Method
(continued)
When all slice area measurements have been accomplished:

Enter Press the ENTER key to complete the stepper volume function.

The accumulated volume calculation is displayed on the image monitor and


the internally stored stepper volume is reset to zero.

46-030370 REV 0 UROLOGY OPTIONS 7-35


This page intentionally left blank.

7-36 UROLOGY OPTIONS 46-030370 REV 0


SECTION 8

ACCESSORIES

Overview

Accessory Panels

Connecting a Sony Page Printer

Connecting a Panasonic VCR

Connecting a Multi-Image Camera

46-030370 REV 2 ACCESSORIES 8-1


This page intentionally left blank.

8-2 ACCESSORIES 46-030370 REV 2


SECTION 8
ACCESSORIES

8-1 Overview
The RT 3200 Advantage - I provides accessory connections for some
standard and optional accessories. Standard with the system is the foot
switch and Sony UP-890 Video Graphic Printer. Optional is the Panasonic
AG-5200/AG-1260/AG-1270 VHS Video Cassette Recorders, Multi-Image
Camera, External Monitor or Data Management Center Computer.

8-2 Accessory Panels


Two panels provide connections for the variety of accessories.

8-2-1 Lower Accessory


Panel
The lower accessory panel is the primary panel used for connection. It is
easily accessible at the front of the system and offers the connections
necessary for several options. Illustrations 8-1 and 8-2 show the location
and layout of the lower accessory panel.

Illustration 8-1
Lower Accessory Panel Location

Lower Accessory Panel


RS-232C Ext TV Ext TV Camera & 12Vdc Foot Switch
TV Printer for Camera
In Out In Out Video Out Shutter
Caution
See Operating Manual
for connection.

46-030370 REV 2 ACCESSORIES 8-3


Illustration 8-2
Lower Accessory Panel Layout

RS-232C Ext TV Ext TV Camera & 12Vdc Foot Switch


TV Printer for Camera
In Out In Out Video Out Shutter
Caution
See Operating Manual
for connection.

1 2 3 4 5 6

The lower accessory panel provides the following connections:

1. RS-232C interface connection for the GE Data Management Center


Computer (ONLY AVAILABLE WITH RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - II)

2. External Monitor Video Connections (camera or viewing monitor)–


(composite video)

3. Video Cassette Recorder Video (composite video)

4. Camera and Video Printer video output and shutter control (compos-
ite video)

5. 12 Vdc power available for accessories

6. Freeze Foot Switch connection

NOTE: The external TV (EXT TV) and VCR video output are the same.
Connection made to both of these simultaneously will cause
the output to be double terminated.

Electrical To avoid injury, the installation of accessories that require the removal
Hazard of system covers to access interior wiring MUST be done by a qualified
service person.

8-4 ACCESSORIES 46-030370 REV 2


8-2-2 Upper Accessory
Panel
Located in the cable well behind the main keyboard under the removable
magnetic panel, the Upper Accessory Panel provides additional connec-
tions for accessories. Illustration 8-3 shows the connections available on the
Upper Accessory Panel.

Illustration 8-3
Upper Accessory Panel Layout

1 2 3

TV Printer
12Vdc
In Shutter

Out Video Out

The Upper Accessory Panel provides the following connections:

1. VCR Video Connections (composite video)

2. Camera or Video Page Printer shutter and video connections

3. 12 Vdc accessory power connection

4. Grommet for AC power cord routing

46-030370 REV 2 ACCESSORIES 8-5


8-3 Sony Video Graphic
Printer Installation

8-3-1 System
Disassembly
1. Loosen the four (4) screws mounting the printer shelf to the bottom of
the keyboard. Slide the shelf and remove it from the keyboard.

2. Remove the front panel by removing five (5) screws.

• Three are located at the top of the front panel that attach it to the
bottom of the keyboard housing.

• The remaining two are located, one on the bottom right side and one
on the bottom left side of the front panel, behind two white rubber
hole plugs.

3. Remove the RF shield by removing eight (8) screws.

4. Gain access to the AC power strip by removing the front connector


panel.

• Remove the four (4) screws, two on each side of the panel.

• Push in and slide the panel to the left.

• Pull it out as far as the wiring will permit and carefully lay it aside.

8-3-2 Page Printer


Power Hook-up
5. Locate the AC power terminal strip (see Illustration 8-4).

• In front is a black twelve (12) connection terminal strip.


THAT IS NOT IT!!!

• Look toward the back of the system, just below that 12 terminal
block.

• Mounted on the back of the power supply bulkhead is a black six (6)
terminal block with three (3) wires attached to terminals 4, 5 and 6.
THIS IS THE ONE!!!

6. Remove the clear terminal strip shield. Connect AC power cord for the
Sony UP-890 as follows:

#4—Black Wire #5—Green Wire #6—White Wire

8-6 ACCESSORIES 46-030370 REV 2


Illustration 8-4
AC Power Terminal
Probe Connector Board

1 2 3 4 5 6

AC Terminal Strip

8-3-3 System
Re-assembly
7. Replace the clear terminal strip cover. Route the AC power cord behind
the RF shield, up from the terminal strip to the top of the RF shield and
out the square notch. Remove white cover from across notch.

8. Re-attach the front panel connector assembly (4 screws).

9. Replace the RF shield and secure it with the eight (8) screws.

10. Replace the front panel cover with the three (3) screws on top and two
behind the white rubber covers.

11. Connect the video cable and remote shutter cable to the front accessory
panel.

46-030370 REV 2 ACCESSORIES 8-7


8-3-4 Mount and
Secure Printer
Shelf
12. Start 4 (M4 x .7 x 8mm) screws into the bottom of the keyboard housing.
Choose the four threaded holes that are on the left side under the TGC
slide pots. (They line up with the holes in the printer shelf).

We recommend you use a thread locking fluid on these screws like


Locktite 242 (blue).

13. Push the printer shelf up on to the four screws through the key hole slots.
Slide the shelf back into the key holes and secure the four (4) screws.

8-3-5 Mount and


Connect the
Printer
14. Remove the screws from the center of the four rubber feet on the Sony
UP-890 page printer.

15. Slide the printer into the shelf. Connect the remote shutter, video and
power cables to the back of the Sony Printer.

16. Pick the holes in the bottom of the printer shelf that line up with the Sony
Page Printer. Secure the Sony Printer to the printer shelf by using four
screws (M3 x .5 x 10mm) through the shelf into the center of the rubber
feet. These screws are found in the small plastic bag that come with the
plate to cover the accessory well below the monitor.

We recommend you use a thread locking fluid on these screws like


Locktite 242 (blue).

17. Power up the system and check the operation of the Sony UP-890.

• See the operator manual and use the RECORD button on the
keyboard of the RT 3200 Advantage - I.

• Insure that the proper gamma curve is selected for the record
output. CONTROL, R, V, ENTER.

8-8 ACCESSORIES 46-030370 REV 2


Illustration 8-6
Sony Connection Sony UP-890
R E S E R V E D

PAPER DIP SW IN OUT


REMOTE GAMMA TYPE
I II III I II III OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 11 12

ON
BT10L ON

VIDEO
DIP SW FUNCTION TABLE
NO FUNCTION SW-ON SW-OFF
1 INTERRUPT ON OFF
2 POSTFEED ON OFF
3 ASPECT 4:3 1:1
4 MEMORY FRAME FIELD
5 IMAGE POSI NEGA AC IN
6 MIRROR NORM REV

7 DIRECTION NORM REV


8 ______ WIDE 2
SCAN
9 WIDE 1 NORM
10 RESERVED ______ ______

11 INPUT B&W COLOR


12 75Ω ON OFF

To
Hard Wired
Connection

RS-232C Ext TV Ext TV Camera & 12Vdc Foot Switch


TV Printer for Camera
In Out In Out Video Out Shutter
Caution
See Operating Manual
for connection.

Lower Accessory Panel

46-030370 REV 2 ACCESSORIES 8-9


8-4 Panasonic AG-5200/
AG-1260/AG-1270/
Sony SVO-1410
Basic Installation
Refer to the VCR Installation document for details.

8-4-1 System
Disassembly
1. Remove the front panel by removing five (5) screws.
• Three are located at the top of the front panel that attach it to the
bottom of the keyboard housing.
• The remaining two are located, one on the bottom right side and one
on the bottom left side of the front panel, behind two white rubber
hole plugs.

2. Remove the RF shield by removing eight (8) screws.

3. Gain access to the AC power strip by removing the front connector panel.
• Remove the four (4) screws, two on each side of the panel.
• Push in and slide the panel to the left.
• Pull it out as far as the wiring will permit and carefully lay it aside.

8-4-2 VCR Power


Hook-up
4. Locate the AC power terminal strip (see Illustration 8-4).
• In front is a black twelve (12) connection terminal strip.
THAT IS NOT IT!!!
• Look toward the back of the system, just below that 12 terminal block.
• Mounted on the back of the power supply bulkhead is a black six (6)
terminal block with three (3) wires attached to terminals 4, 5 and 6.
THIS IS THE ONE!!!

5. Remove the clear terminal strip shield. Connect AC pigtail cord for the
Panasonic AG-5200 as follows:
#4—Black Wire #5—Green Wire #6—White Wire
Connect Panasonic AG-5200/AG-1260/AG-1270/Sony SVO-1410 power
cord to pigtail.

8-4-3 System
Re-assembly
6. Replace the clear terminal strip cover. Route the AC power cord behind
the RF shield, up from the terminal strip to the top of the RF shield and
out the square notch.

7. Re-attach the front panel connector assembly (4 screws).

8. Replace the RF shield and secure it with the eight (8) screws.

9. Replace the front panel cover with the three screws on top and two
behind the white rubber covers.

10. Connect the video cable and remote shutter cable to the front accessory
panel.

8-10 ACCESSORIES 46-030370 REV 2


8-4-4 Mount and
Connect VCR
Mount the VCR to the accessory shelf with the hardware provided in the
installation kit.

Connect the video input/output from the VCR to the lower accessory panel
as shown in Illustration 8-7 (Panasonic AG-5200), Illustration 8-8 (Panasonic
AG-1260/AG-1270) or Illustration 8-9 (Sony SVO-1410).

Illustration 8-7
VCR Connection
Panasonic AG-5200
CAUTION ATTENTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK RISQUE DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE
DO NOT OPEN NE PAS OUVRIR (VQL3019)

REMOTE AUDIO IN
CH4
IN OUT SERIAL CH1(L) CH2(R)
REAR OUT

CH3
FRONT
SERIES PB
VHF
Model No. AG-5200-P
Serial No. G0TB00219 LI
S TE D

FCC ID: ACJ9TCSTV007 UL

VIDEO
IN
Panasonic

9F
EQ
Matsushita Electric Ind. Co.,Ltd. UIP
M EN T
67

120V AC 50-60Hz 25W Made in Japan

(VGN4989)
(VGH2298-2)

VIDEO IN VIDEO OUT AUDIO OUT


CH1(L) CH2(R) AUTO PLAY AUTO REPEAT TIMER MODE LOCK
TAPE VIDEO
OFF ON END OFF END PLAY OFF REC OFF ON

To AC
Pigtail or
Hard Wired
Connection

RS-232C Ext TV Ext TV Camera & 12Vdc Foot Switch


TV Printer for Camera
In Out In Out Video Out Shutter
Caution
See Operating Manual
for connection.

Lower Accessory Panel

46-030370 REV 2 ACCESSORIES 8-11


Illustration 8-8
VCR Connection

Panasonic AG-1260/AG-1270

IN FROM
ANT.
VHF/UHF CAUTION
VIDEO AUDIO Panasonic
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER
OUT TO TV IN OUT IN OUT B 2 S A 3 4 4 8 5 RISK OF ELECTRIC
SERIAL NO.
2 . 1 9 . 1 9 9 2 SHOCK DO NOT OPEN
MFR’D
3 CH. 4 AG-1260-P
MODEL NO.
120V AC
FCC ID: ACJ927087AI
AVIS
UL 60HZ
19W
MADE IN JAPAN
® RISQUE DE
LISTED 679F CHOC ELECTRIQUE
E72900 (VGNS3239)
NE PAS PUVRIR

To AC
Pigtail or
Hard Wired
Connection

RS-232C Ext TV Ext TV Camera & 12Vdc Foot Switch


TV Printer for Camera
In Out In Out Video Out Shutter
Caution
See Operating Manual
for connection.

Lower Accessory Panel

8-12 ACCESSORIES 46-030370 REV 2


Illustration 8-9
VCR Connection

Sony SVO-1410

IN
ED SP
IN IN SONY LABEL
VERT. SYNC. ADJ.
CONTROL S
IN U
L
OUT
OUT

CH - 4
OUT
CH - 3
AUDIO VIDEO TV (OUT) VHF/UHF RF UNIT

To AC
BNC Angle Adapter
Pigtail
(46-233422P1)

BNC Angle Adapter


(46-233422P1)

Phono Plug to BNC


(46-285434P1)

Phono Plug to BNC


(46-285434P1)

TV Printer
12Vdc
In Shutter

Out Video Out

Accessory Well Connector Panel

46-030370 REV 2 ACCESSORIES 8-13


8-5 Connecting A Multi-
Image Camera
A multi-image camera can be connected to the RT 3200 Advantage - I
system. The camera can not be mounted to the system chassis, but can be
positioned close to the console and the camera video input connected to an
accessory panel.

The preferred video connection for a multi-image camera is the "EXT TV-
OUT" connection on the lower accessory panel. This is shown in Illustration
8-10.

Illustration 8-10
Camera Video Hook-up

Lower Accessory Panel

RS-232C Ext TV Ext TV Camera & 12Vdc Foot Switch


TV Printer for Camera
In Out In Out Video Out Shutter
Caution
See Operating Manual
for connection.

Connect Multi-Image Camera Video here

8-14 ACCESSORIES 46-030370 REV 2


8-5 Connecting A Multi-
Image Camera (continued)
If connection to the lower accessory panel is not possible, the multi-image
camera video can be connected to the upper accessory panel. You may use
either video output for the VCR or Page Printer on the upper panel. See
Illustration 8-11.

Illustration 8-11
Camera Hook-up
Upper Panel
Upper Accessory Panel

TV Printer
12Vdc
In Shutter

Out Video Out

Optional Camera Video Connections

46-030370 REV 2 ACCESSORIES 8-15


This page intentionally left blank.

8-16 ACCESSORIES 46-030370 REV 2


SECTION 9

APPENDICES

Control Parameters

Acoustic Level Notes

Cleaning and Inspecting

Troubleshooting

Maintenance

46-030370 REV 0 APPENDICES 9-1


This page intentionally left blank.

9-2 APPENDICES 46-030370 REV 0


APPENDIX A
CONTROL PARAMETERS

A-1 Control Parameters


The transmit acoustic power and intensity output of the imaging system is
related to various control settings which you can change during the course
of an exam. You should be aware of which controls affect output so you can
obtain the optimal image, while at the same time exposing the patient to only
minimum ultrasound energy.

A-2 Control Parameters


Which Affect Acoustic
Sound
The following parameters can affect acoustic output.

Focus
Changing the focus to optimize the image over a particular region of the scan
changes the depth at which the maximum intensities may occur. Typically,
the region of maximum intensity is close to the focal distance. Values
reported in Table A-1 represent the maximum intensity at one particular
focal depth. All other focus depths result in lower values.

M-Mode
Placing the machine into M-Mode affects the acoustic output of the system.
In M-Mode, repetitive pulse firings occur on the same scan line (correspond-
ing to the M-Mode vector displayed) which increases the time-average of
SPTA intensity along the scan line chosen. The SPTA intensity is typically
increased by a factor of 30 to 60 times over that in B-Mode. In almost all
cases, the total output power and the pulse average intensities (i.e., SPPA
or Im) are not affected, even along the scan line chosen.

B/M-Mode
In this combination mode, both B- and M-Mode vectors are generated by the
machine. The SPTA intensity will be increased along the M-Mode line
selected, but typically not to the extent as when M-Mode alone is selected.
As with M-Mode, the SPPA, I-m and total power remain unchanged.

The SPPA and I-m intensities remain relatively constant, regardless of mode
selected. The SPPA intensity is strongly affected by mode selection, as a result
of more pulses being directed at the specific site selected. The SPTA intensity
is increased in M-Mode over B-Mode as shown in Table A-1.

46-030370 REV 0 CONTROL PARAMETERS A-1


This page intentionally left blank.

A-2 CONTROL PARAMETERS 46-030370 REV 0


Table A-1
RT3200 Advantage - I Acoustic Levels

PRF* Power l-SPTA (mW/cm2) I-SPPA W/cm2) I-m (W/cm2) 20dB Beam Entrance
Probe Application Mode (kHz) (mW) @Depth z cm @Depth z cm @Depth z cm Area mm2 Beam cm2

Type A Small Parts 2D 3.9 0.7 2.2 @ 3.1 42 @ 3.1 46 @ 3.1 4.4 1.08

46-030370 REV 3
5.0 MHz M 3.9 0.7 42 @ 3.1 42 @ 3.1 46 @ 3.1 4.4 1.08
Focus: 2

Type B General 2D 3.9 3.1 1.2 @ 6.5 20 @ 6.5 26 @ 6.5 22 3.6


3.5 MHz OB & M 3.9 3.1 32 @ 6.5 20 @ 6.5 26 @ 6.5 22 3.6
Focus: 3 Abdomen

Type C General 2D 3.9 3.1 0.8 @ 6.5 20 @ 6.5 26 @ 6.5 24 3.6


3.5 MHz OB M 3.9 3.1 32 @ 6.5 20 @ 6.5 26 @ 6.5 24 3.6
Focus: 3

Type D Biopsy 2D 3.9 1.1 1.2 @ 5.8 22 @ 5.8 26 @ 5.8 9.3 3.6
3.5 MH M 3.9 1.1 30 @ 5.8 21 @ 5.8 26 @ 5.8 9.3 3.6
Focus: 3

Type E General 2D 3.9 1.3 2.5 @ 6.2 89 @ 6.2 111 @ 6.2 4.7 3.6
5.0 MHz OB & M 3.9 1.3 94 @ 6.2 89 @ 6.2 111 @ 6.2 4.7 3.6
Focus: 3 Abdomen

Type F Intra- 2D 3.9 1.5 3.3 @ 5.8 83 @ 5.8 83 @ 5.8 4.7 3.6
5.0 MHz operative M 3.9 1.5 78 @ 5.8 83 @ 5.8 83 @ 5.8 4.7 3.6
Focus: 3

Type G Rectal 2D 3.9 1.6 2.8 @ 6.1 64 @ 6.1 67 @ 6.1 5.9 2.16
5.0 MHz M 3.9 1.6 67 @ 6.1 64 @ 6.1 67 @ 6.1 5.9 2.16
Focus: 3

Type H Small 2D 3.9 0.6 1.5 @ 2.8 135 @ 2.8 117 @ 2.8 3.1 1.44
7.5 MHz Parts M 3.9 0.6 92 @ 2.8 135 @ 2.8 117 @ 2.8 3.1 1.44
Focus: 3

Type MZ Endo- 2D 3.9 0.3 0.2 @ 4.0 7.3 @ 4.0 7.8 @ 4.0 1.6 0.6

CONTROL PARAMETERS
6.5 MHz cavitary M 3.9 0.3 5.9 @ 4.0 7.3 @ 4.0 7.8 @ 4.0 1.6 0.6
Focus: 2

*PRF is the Pulse Repetition Frequency applicable for SPTA (Spatial Peak Temporal Average) case only.

A-3
** NOTE: Figures shown are: 1) Measured in water 2) Maximum values by application 3) in situ value (Type CF) and 4) 6dB Beam Area mm2 (Type CF)
Table A-1 (continued)
RT3200 Advantage - I Acoustic Levels

A-4
PRF* Power l-SPTA (mW/cm2) I-SPPA W/cm2) I-m (W/cm2) 20dB Beam Entrance
Probe Application Mode (kHz) (mW) @Depth z cm @Depth z cm @Depth z cm Area mm2 Beam cm2

Type R Endocavitary 2D 3.9 3 2 @ 2.6 97 @ 2.6 129.2 @ 2.6


7.0 MHz M 3.9 3 90.6 @ 2.6 97 @ 2.6 129.2 @ 2.6
Focus: 2

Type S Abdomen 2D 3.9 4.8 2.9 @ 3.6 41.4 @ 3.6 52.3 @ 3.6
3.5 MHz Urology M 3.9 4.8 70 @ 3.6 41.4 @ 3.6 52.3 @ 3.6
Focus: 2

Type CA Abdomen 2D 3.9 5 8.3 @ 4.9 148 @ 4.9 154 @ 4.9 7.8 2.08
5.0 MHz OB/GYN M 3.9 5 30 @ 4.9 148 @ 4.9 154 @ 4.9 7.8 2.08
Focus: 3

CONTROL PARAMETERS
Type CB Abdomen 2D 3.9 3 3.1@ 4.4 31 @ 4.4 41 @ 4.4 18 2.08
3.5 MHz OB/GYN M 3.9 3 48 @ 4.4 31 @ 4.4 41 @ 4.4 18 2.08
Focus: 3

Type CC Abdomen 2D 3.9 1.7 .78@ 5.0 15.3 @ 4.9 20 @ 4.9 53.4 3.6
3.5 MHz OB/GYN M 3.9 1.7 23.6 @ 4.9 15.3 @ 4.9 20 @ 4.9 53.4 3.6
Focus: 2

Type CK (CF) Abdomen 2D 0.015 6.6 1.2@5.1 26.5@5.1 7.25 ** 1.22


3.5 MHz OB/GYN M 3.9 6.6 41.7@5.1 26.5@5.1 7.25 ** 1.22
Focus: 3

Type CV OB/GYN 2D 3.9 2.6 2.1 @ 5.0 50.5 @ 5.0 66.8 @ 5.0 137.4 .64
5.0 MHz M 3.9 2.6 9.0 @ 5.0 50.5 @ 5.0 66.8 @ 5.0 137.4 .64
Focus: 2

Type LP Small parts B 3.9 1.6 1.8 @ 4.2 100.1 @ 4.2 110.6 @ 4.2
6.0Mhz Breast M 3.9 2.2 129 @ 4.0 144.8 @ 4.0 117.4 @ 4.0
Focus: 2 B/M 3.9 2.2 18.3 @ 4.0 132.6 @ 4.0 113.7 @ 4.0

*PRF is the Pulse Repetition Frequency applicable for SPTA (Spatial Peak Temporal Average) case only.

** NOTE: Figures shown are: 1) Measured in water 2) Maximum values by application 3) in situ value (Type CF) and 4) 6dB Beam Area mm2 (Type CF)

46-030370 REV 3
Table A-1 (continued)
RT3200 Advantage - I Acoustic Levels

PRF* Power l-SPTA (mW/cm2) I-SPPA W/cm2) I-m (W/cm2) 20dB Beam Entrance
Probe Application Mode (kHz) (mW) @Depth z cm @Depth z cm @Depth z cm Area mm2 Beam cm2

Type RA Transrectal 2D 3.9 3 2 @ 2.6 97 @ 2.6 129.2 @ 2.6

46-030370 REV 3
7.0 MHz M 3.9 3 90.6 @ 2.6 97 @ 2.6 129.2 @ 2.6
Focus: 2

Type ATF/ATV Transvaginal 2D 3.9 1.5 .5 @ 3.0 17.4 @ 3.0 33.9 @ 3.0
5.0 MHz M 3.9 1.5 18.4 @ 3.0 17.4 @ 3.0 33.9 @ 3.0
Focus: 2

*PRF is the Pulse Repetition Frequency applicable for SPTA (Spatial Peak Temporal Average) case only.

** NOTE: Figures shown are: 1) Measured in water 2) Maximum values by application 3) in situ value (Type CF) and 4) 6dB Beam Area mm2 (Type CF)

CONTROL PARAMETERS
A-5
This page intentionally left blank.

A-6 CONTROL PARAMETERS 46-030370 REV 3


APPENDIX B
ACOUSTIC LEVEL NOTES

B-1 Acoustic Level Notes


1. System Acoustic Power Control set at 100%, with system parameters
adjusted to maximize individual intensities.

2. Intensities and focal areas measured in water at locations which


correspond to maximized normalized (in-situ) intensities.

3. The water values can be converted to normalized (in-situ) values by


using the following formula:

It = Iwe-0.23a´fz

where:

It = in-situ intensity

Iw = measured water intensity

e = appx. 2.7183

a´ = tissue attenuation (0.3dB/MHz/cm)

f = Ultrasonic center frequency (MHz)

z = ultrasound path length (one-way)(cm)

4. In-situ intensity values remain below FDA specified pre-enactment


values for applicable clinic applications for all control settings.

5. 20dB Beam Area represents the 2-dB two-way beam area of a single
vector measured at the depth of maximum SPTA intensity.

6. Beam Entrance Area represents the area at the surface of the trans-
ducer emitting one acoustic vector. For sector scanners, this is also the
active acoustic area in contact with the patient.

B-2 Measurement Basis for


Probe Output

Acoustic Power (milliwatts)


Probe acoustic power output is determined by measuring the force exerted
on an absorbing target by the acoustic radiation field with a force
microbalance.

Acoustic Intensity
(milliwatts/cm2 or watts/cm2)
Probe acoustic intensity levels are determined using a calibrated
(milliwatts/cm2 or watts/cm2) PVDF miniature hydrophone.

46-030370 REV 0 ACOUSTIC LEVEL NOTES B-1


This page intentionally left blank.

B-2 ACOUSTIC LEVEL NOTES 46-030370 REV 0


APPENDIX C
CLEANING AND INSPECTING

C-1 Overview This section explains how to clean and disinfect the probes and how to clean
the console, monitor, video cassette recorder, printer and multi imaging
device surfaces. It also provides a checklist for monthly system inspections.

C-2 Probe Cleaning


Before cleaning the probes, refer to the caution, cleaning and
disinfection instructions in the probe box.

• After each use, disconnect the probe from the ultrasound console and
remove coupling gel from the transducer by wiping with a soft cloth and
rinse with flowing water.

• Wash the probe surface with mild soap in lukewarm water. Scrub the
probe as needed using a soft sponge, gauze or cloth to remove all visible
residue from the probe surface Prolonged soaking or scrubbing with a
soft bristle brush (such as a toothbrush) may be necessary if material
has dried onto the probe surface.

• Rinse the probe with enough clean, potable water to remove all visible
soap residue.

• Air dry or dry with a soft cloth.

Special Cleaning Instructions for the MZ probe: When cleaning the MZ


probe, it is important to be sure that all surfaces are thoroughly cleaned. This
probe has an adjustable two-part handle that must be disassembled to gain
access to all surfaces. To disassemble the handle, completely remove the
handle adjustment screw located mid-way between the cable entry and
probe tip. The two handle halves and adjustment screw must be thoroughly
cleaned along with the main probe shaft as described earlier. After rinsing
and drying is completed, the probe handle can be loosely reassembled for
the disinfection process.

WARNING Ultrasound transducers can easily be damaged by improper handling.


Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment
damage.

• Do not immerse the probe into any liquid beyond the level indicated by
the immersion level diagram in Illustration C-1.

• Never immerse the transducer connector or probe adapters into any


liquid.

• Avoid mechanical shock or impact to the transducer.

46-030370 REV 2
3 CLEANING AND INSPECTING C-1
C-2 Probe Cleaning (cont'd)
• Transducer damage can result from contact with inappropriate coupling
or cleaning agents.

¤ Do not soak or saturate transducers with solutions containing


alcohol, bleach or hydrogen peroxide.
¤ Avoid contact with solutions or coupling gels containing mineral oil
or lanolin.
¤ Avoid temperatures above 60°C.

• Inspect the transducer prior to each use for damage or degradation to


the housing, cable, strain relief, lens and seal.

• Do not use a damaged or defective transducer.

C-3 Disinfection

Perform the cleaning instructions in Section C-2 before following the


disinfection procedures.

• Properly immerse the probe in a suitable commercial germicide. Use an


EPA registered germicide intended for use on plastic medical instru-
ments. Follow the germicide manufacturer's instructions regarding
concentration, time of contact, storage and disposal.

• 2% Glutaraldehyde type solutions without surfactants are recommended.

Cidex is the only germicide that has been tested to be safe and compatible
with the materials used in the construction of the probes.

• Follow the germicide manufacturer's instructions for rinsing after removal


from the germicide.

Special Disinfecting Instructions for the MZ Probe: After proper cleaning, to


properly disinfect the MZ probe, the probe handle can be reassembled
loosely so that the entire probe with handle can be immersed in the
germicide solution. The adjustment screw must be kept loose so that
germicide can penetrate to all surfaces. After immersing, rotate and shake
the probe while it is below the surface of the germicide to eliminate air
pockets. Allow the germicide to remain in contact with the fully immersed
probe, for high-level disinfection, according to the germicide manufacturer's
recommended time. To remove all germicide residue, final rinsing should
be done following the germicide's manufacturer's instructions. Remove
excess water by shaking and allow to air dry.

C-2 CLEANING AND INSPECTING 46-030370 REV 2


3
C-4 Gas Sterilization
Perform the cleaning instructions in Section C-2 before following the gas
sterilization procedures.

• If necessary, ethylene oxide or formalin gas sterilization process may be


used on surgical and biopsy probes only.

• Follow the instructions, recommendations and precautions provided by


the manufacturer of the sterilization equipment and gas supplier.

• To avoid probe damage, do not use process cycles that exceed 60°C or
pressures that vary from normal atmosphere.

Adequate cleaning and disinfection is necessary to prevent disease


transmission. Use probe sheaths whenever possible. It is the respon-
sibility of the equipment user to verify and maintain the effectiveness
of the infection control procedures in use.

46-030370 REV 2
3 CLEANING AND INSPECTING C-3
Illustration C-1
Probe Cleaning

Do not dip the probe beyond the level indicated.

Type A Probe Type B Probe


Aperture Aperture

Type C Probe Type D Probe



Aperture
Aperture

Type E Probe Type F Probe


Aperture

Aperture

C-4 CLEANING AND INSPECTING 46-030370 REV 2


3
Illustration C-1
Probe Cleaning (continued)

Do not dip the probe beyond the level indicated.

Type G Probe
Type CC (Convex) Probe

Drain (Out) Drain (In)


Aperture

Aperture

Type CA, CB (Convex) Probe Type H Probe


Aperture Aperture

Type S Probe
Type LP Probe

Aperture

Aperture

46-030370 REV 2
3 CLEANING AND INSPECTING C-5
Illustration C-1
Probe Cleaning (continued)

Do not dip the probe beyond the level indicated.

Type R Probe Type MZ Probe Type SV, TV (Convex) Probe

Aperture
Aperture

Aperture

Type RA Probe Type ATV, ATF (straight handle ONLY) Probe


22
20

Type CK (CF) Probe


18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4

Aperture Aperture
Aperture

Aperture

C-6 CLEANING AND INSPECTING 46-030370 REV 2


3
C-5 System Cleaning
We suggest a schedule of cleaning for the console and the monitors. The
image screen monitor and the operator console are the most likely to
accumulate dust and grime.

C-5-1 Console Surfaces


Use a mild general purpose non-abrasive soap and water solution and a
folded cloth. Wipe down the top, front (including the keys), back, and both
sides of the console.

C-5-2 Monitor Face and


Filter
Remove the filter as shown in Illustration C-2.

Illustration C-2
Filter Removal

2
1

1
Filter
2 Clamps

(1) Slide the filter clamps outwards.


(2) Pull the filter clamps out.

Use a soft, folded cloth and a glass cleaner solution. Apply the glass cleaner
to the cloth and then gently wipe the monitor face.

NOTE: Do not use a glass cleaner that has a hydrocarbon base (such as
Benzene, Methyl Alcohol or Methyl Ethyl Ketone) on monitors with an anti-
glare shield. Prolonged use of such cleaners will damage the anti-glare
shield. Hard rubbing will also damage the shield.

After cleaning the monitor face and filter, re-install the filter on the monitor.
Insert the filter clamps and slide them inwards securely. Refer to
Illustration C-2.

NOTE: Make sure that the filter is securely fixed by the filter clamps. It is
important to prevent hte falling hazard of the filter. A click sound will be heard
when the filter clamp is secured by the locking mechanism.

46-030370 REV 2
3 CLEANING AND INSPECTING C-7
C-5-3 Video Cassette
Recorder
Turn off the RT 3200 Advantage - I before cleaning the VCR.
Wipe the external surfaces of the unit with a clean, dry cloth. Do not use a
wet cloth or any cleaning fluid because it may enter and damage the unit.
Clean the record and playback heads with a soft, non-abrasive cleaning
system.

C-5-4 Multi-Imaging
Device
Unplug the RT 3200 Advantage - I before cleaning the Multi-Imaging Device.
Use a mild, general purpose, non-abrasive soap and water solution and
folded cloth. Wipe down the top, front, back, and both sides of the unit.

C-5-5 Page Printer


Turn off the RT 3200 Advantage - I before cleaning the Printer.
Use a soft, folded cloth. Remove stubborn stains with a cloth lightly
dampened with a mild detergent solution.

Never use strong solvents, such as thinner or benzine, or abrasive cleansers


because they will damage the cabinet.

No further maintenance, such as lubrication, is required.

If you have printer problems, refer to Appendix D - Troubleshooting or


contact your GE service representative.

C-6 Monthly Inspection

Electrical To avoid electrical shock hazard, do not remove panels or covers from
Hazard console. This servicing must be performed by qualified service
personnel.

• Examine connectors on cables for any mechanical defects.


• Examine entire length of cable for cuts or abrasions.
• Examine equipment for loose or missing hardware.

If you find any defects or malfunctions, do not operate the equipment.


Inform qualified service person. Contact a General Electric Service Repre-
sentative for information.

C-8 CLEANING AND INSPECTING 46-030370 REV 2


3
APPENDIX D
TROUBLESHOOTING

D-1 Overview
This section supplies two tables to help you trace the causes of some
display and printing problems.

D-2 Troubleshooting the


RT 3200 Advantage - I
Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When power is switched Power cable may be dis- Connect power cable or
ON, nothing appears on connected from the socket. use different wall
the monitor. receptacle.

The power fuse may be Turn off power switch.


blown. Replace fuse. Extra
fuses are with the
accessories.

No image appears on the The front panel Check position of the


monitor. <FREEZE> key may be <FREEZE> key.
on.

Brightness and Contrast Readjust the Brightness


may be misadjusted. and Contrast.

Dark vertical stripes ap- Particles may be stuck to Clean the surface of the
pear on the image. the surface of the probe. probe.

Many blinking dots of Other ultrasonic units may Move the ultrasonic units
noise appear on the im- be in use near the RT 3200. away from the RT 3200.
age.
There may be high-fre- Use an alternate wall re-
quency noise sources near ceptacle.
the RT 3200.
Move the RT 3200 away
from the noise sources.

Equipment generating Move the source of the


Wavering image on the strong magnetic field may noise away from the RT
display screen. be near the RT 3200. 3200.

The Gain control may be Increase the Gain.


No scanned image when at 0dB.
probe is placed on patient.
Selected wrong probe. Depress probe select.

If necessary, contact a GE Service Representative or an Authorized


International Distributor.

General Electric Company


Medical Systems Group

GE Cares (Service): (800) 437-1171


Accessories: (800) 433-5566 or (414) 524-5140
Customer Answer Center: (800) 543-9018 or (414) 647-4420

46-030370 REV 0 TROUBLESHOOTING D-1


D-3 Troubleshooting the
Page Printer
Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

Moisture condensation. A heater was turned on Let the unit dry out for 1-2
OR hours
Room humidity suddenly OR
rose Gradually raise the
OR temperature until
Printer was abruptly moisture evaporates.
moved from a cold place THEN
to a warmer one. Press the Feed button
while gently pulling on
the edge of paper so it
feeds through smoothly.

Paper is jammed. Moisture condensation 1. Raise the Head Set


OR lever to OFF.
Paper inserted crooked. 2. Carefully remove the
stuck paper by hand.
(Do not use pointed
devices. They may
damage the printing
head or the rear
surfaces of the platen.)
3. Make sure there are no
creases in the paper.
4. Insert the paper straight
into the platen.

Printer head is dirty. After printing 2-3 rolls of 1. Following the Paper
paper, dust and grime col- Loading procedure, in-
lected on the head. sert the supplied Head
Cleaning Sheet.
2. Turn the Head Set Le-
ver ON.
3. Pull the cleaning sheet
paper edge strongly.
4. Repeat steps 1-3, if nec-
essary

After printing almost totally The printer has printed 20 Switch the Posi/Nega se-
black pictures, white prints or more almost totally black lector to the opposite posi-
turn black. pictures. tion for a while.

After printing almost totally The printer has printed Stop printing for a while.
black picture, the subse- dozens of almost totally When the temperature of
quent prints became faint. black pictures. A protec- the printing head drops
tive circuit is preventing the back to normal, printing
head from overheating. resumes.

Images come out black or Contrast/Brightness Check Contrast/Bright-


white. misadjusted. ness. Adjust if necessary.

Alphanumerics are blurry. Field/Frame switch Adjust Field/Frame switch


misadjusted. to Frame position.

D-2 TROUBLESHOOTING 46-030370 REV 0


APPENDIX E
MAINTENANCE

E-1 Check-up and Service


Regular maintenance is necessary for safe and trouble free use of the unit.

Please perform these daily, weekly and monthly maintenance instructions.

DAILY CHECK LIST

• Clean the ultrasound gel from each probe after each use.

• Clean the display monitor. Use a soft, slightly moistened cloth. If the
monitor is still soiled, use a slightly moistened cloth with detergent.
Then clean with a soft cloth.

• Check the power cable for cracks or deterioration.

WEEKLY CHECK LIST

• Check probes for damages.

• Check electrical cables.

• Clean around the unit.

MONTHLY CHECK LIST

• Visually inspect the unit every month. If any damage is found, contact
your GE Service Representative.

• Check the mechanical connections or keyboard problems.

• Check the casters for proper locking operation.

• Clean the VTR record and playheads in order to obtain good-quality


pictures. Use a non-abrasive VTR cleaning system approved by the
VTR manufacturer.

• Clean the page printer, Camera, and display monitor.

E-2 How to Store the Unit


• Turn off the main power switch and unplug the unit from the AC
receptacle.

• Position the unit and lock the front castors.

• Cover the unit.

46-030370 REV 0 MAINTENANCE E-1


E-2
E-3 How to Move a Unit

MAINTENANCE
!
To avoid injury by tipping over, SET THE MONITOR TO THE LOWEST POSITION BEFORE MOVING.
Pour éviter ie basculement accidentel de la machine, BAISSER LE MONITEUR AVANT DÉPLACEMENT. To avoid injury by tipping over, DO NOT PUSH THIS UNIT FROM THE SIDES.
Um bei bewegung des Gerätes Beschädigungen zu vermeiden, STELLEN SIE DEN MONITOR AUF Pour éviter ie basculement accidentel de la machine, NE PAS LA POUSSER PAR LE CÔTÉ.
DIE NIEDRIGSTE POSITION EIN. Um bei bewegung des Gerätes Beschädigungen zu vermeiden, SCHIEBEN SIE DEN
PREDISPORRE IL MONITOR NELLA POSIZIONE PIU BASSA PRIMA DI MUOVERE la macchina per MONITOR NICHT VON DER SEITE.
evitare rischi di rottura. Per evitare rischi di rottura, NON SPINGERE LA MACCHINA DI LATO.
Para evitar daños por voltearse el sistema, POSICIONE EL MONITOR A SU NIVEL MÁS BAJO ANTES Para evitar daños por voltearse el sistema, NO MUEVA EL SISTEMA DESDE LOS LADOS.
DE MOVER EL SISTEMA.
or camera options are integrated into the system.

46-030370 REV 0
It is easy to move the RT 3200 Advantage - I because the page printer, VTR
E-3 How to Move a Unit
(continued)
Before moving the unit:

• Make sure that the probe holder is fixed and probes are properly stored.

• Securely place the power cord and accessory cables around the rear
handle.

• Check to insure the wheels are unlocked.

• Make sure monitor height adjustment is in its lowest possible position.

E-4 Monitor Preparation and


Installation
1. Unpack the monitor from its shipping box.

2. On the monitor, remove the one slotted screw on the bottom, center front
of the monitor. Remove the small section of the shell from the bottom
of the monitor housing.

3. On the RT 3200 Advantage - I system monitor neck, pull the small white
rubber plug from the mount on the monitor neck and unscrew the swivel
limit screw enough to mount the monitor.

Route the monitor connector cable out the slot in the monitor.

4. Place the monitor on the monitor neck, aligning the slots and insuring
that no cables are pinched.

5. Screw in the swivel limit screw on the side of the monitor neck to secure
the monitor. Replace the small white rubber cover.

6. Connect the keyed monitor power and video plug.

Carefully check the swivel action of the monitor. Insure no cables are
binding.

7. Replace the small shell plate on the bottom of the monitor housing and
secure it with the slotted screw.

8. Turn on the RT 3200 Advantage - I system and verify monitor operation.

46-030370 REV 0 MAINTENANCE E-3


E-5 Removing the Monitor
Reverse the monitor installation procedure in order to remove the monitor
from the system for shipment.

The monitor should be securely packed in its original box or equivalent.

CAUTION Without the weight of the monitor in the gas shock, the monitor height
adjustment moves very rapidly.

Do not place any objects or your body in the path of the monitor
pedestal, if the monitor adjustment is activated, without the monitor
attached.

E-4 MAINTENANCE 46-030370 REV 0


SECTION 10

RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES

Overview

Ellipse Measurement Function

HIP Dysplasia Calculation

EFBW—Third Calculation

Gestational Summary Report Page

Report Page Sequencing

Measurement Averaging Page

Anatomical Survey Report Page

User Programmable Comments Library

Urology Summary Report Page

Record Output —Line Printer

Prostate Body Marker Patterns

Calc 3

Cine Memory Operation (OPTION)

46-030370 REV 3 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 10-1


This page intentionally left blank.

10-2 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 46-030370 REV 3


SECTION 10
RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES

10-1 Overview
Please take some time to browse through this section. It describes the many
time saving and income generating features available with the RT 3200
Advantage - III upgrade. Contact your GE Ultrasound Sales Representative
concerning how these features can be added to your system.

The "Ellipse Measurement Function" provides a quick, easy way to measure


circumferences and areas. It speeds up the measurement of head and
abdominal circumferences by offering an option to the trace method.

The "HIP Dysplasia Calculation" provides a method to evaluate the devel-


opment of the infant hip.

A "Third EFBW Calculation" uses femur length, head and abdominal


circumferences to estimate fetal birth weight. This provides a good cross-
check with the other two EFBW calculations.

The "Gestational or Obstetrical Summary Report" provides a quick, easy


and accurate summary of all designated OB measurements taken during an
exam. From the measurements taken, calculations such as Cephalic Index,
EFBW, AFI and Composite Gestational Age are displayed. Patient informa-
tion in the heading, comments and a space for the physicians signature
supply a concise summary for the patients records or the referring physician.

The "Measurement Averaging Page" allows you to average multiple mea-


surement types for the Gestational Summary Report. It also allows easy
editing of measurement errors that may be out of range.

The "Anatomical Survey Report Page" provides a list of anatomy, normally


imaged with selections, to designate a normal or abnormal appearance.
Patient information in the heading, along with the comments section,
provides an excellent summary for patient records or the referring physician.

The "User Programmable Comments Library" provides a productivity fea-


ture that saves time when annotating a scan image or inputting frequently
used comments into a report.

The "Urology Report Page" provides a summary specific to an urology exam


with PPSA calculation.

The "Prostate Body Marker Patterns" have been added to facilitate the
urology exam. Both inverted and non-inverted prostate patterns can
illustrate the exact probe location.

Calc 3 provides GYN and IVF calculations that are entered on the GYN and
IVF Report Pages.

32 frame Cine Memory option capabilities.

46-030370 REV 3 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 10-3


10-2 Ellipse Measurement
Function
An ellipse measurement function has been provided in order to improve the
measurement of head and abdominal circumferences and areas.

The ellipse function supersedes any prior measurements on the screen.


Entering the ellipse mode clears all measurements, calipers and traces just
as it would when you press the OFF key.

Press the DIST key, then press the TRACE/AREA key. Both the DIST and
Dist Trace TRACE/AREA LEDs will light and the highlighted cursor will appear
Area
on the screen.

NOTE: Pressing DIST or TRACE/AREA keys at any time before the


completion of this sequence will exit the ellipse mode and
remove any ellipse graphics from the display.

Use the TRACKBALL to position the cursor at one end of the trans-
T. B. verse axis of the ellipse. (i.e. BPD for HC or TAD for AC)


Press SET. A second cursor will appear.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to position the highlighted "+" cursor to the opposite
T. B. end of the transverse axis.


Press SET. The ellipse graphic will appear with a 1:1 Aspect Ratio (a circle).
Set

NOTE: The transverse diameter is between the two "+" cursors. The
sagittal diameter is between the two "x" cursors. The
highlighted "x" cursor is now active.


Use the TRACKBALL to position the highlighted "x" cursor to the upper end
T. B. of the sagittal axis.


Press SET. The highlighted "x" cursor is now active.
Set


Use the TRACKBALL to position the highlighted "x" cursor to the lower end
T. B. of the sagittal axis.


(continued)

10-4 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 46-030370 REV 3


10-2 Ellipse Measurement
Function (continued)


Press SET. The original "+" cursor is now active.
Set

NOTE: Each time you press SET, the cursors will become alternately
active. You may make adjustments to the ellipse as you desire.
The highlighted cursor is the active cursor.


When you are satisfied with the ellipse, press MEAS to complete the
Meas measurement.

The two diameters, circumference and the area will be displayed in their
respective fields on the left-hand side of the display screen.

This measurement may be used in OB TBL 1 (AC and HC). It may also be
used in user programmable OB TBL 2 menu levels 4 and 5.
▼ For gestational age estimations after making an ellipse measurement,
OB OB
Tbl 1 or Tbl 2 select the function (OB TBL 1 or 2).


Select the menu level and press ENTER.
Enter

Illustration 10-1
Ellipse Measurement

GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
12 : 10 : 05
CA 5MHz
1.0
D+ 39
X 42
X
X
C+ 127
X
X
X
A+ 12.86
X
X
X

G68D54T60
GE

46-030370 REV 3 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 10-5


10-3 HIP Dysplasia
Calculation
The HIP calculation is provided to assist in assessing the development of the
infant hip. In this calculation three straight lines are superimposed on the
image and aligned with the anatomical features. The two angles are
computed, displayed and can be used by the physician in making a
diagnosis.

The three lines are:

1. The Baseline connects the osseous acetabulum convexity to the


point where the joint capsule and the perichondrium unite with the
disc bone.

2. The inclination line connects the osseous convexity to the labrum


acetabulare.

3. The Acetabulum roof line connects the lower edge of the osileum
to the osseous convexity.

Illustration 10-2
Hip Dysplasia Calculation


3

2 β 1

The Angle ∝ (Alpha) is the supplement of the angle between lines 1 and 3.
It characterizes the osseous convexity. The angle β (Beta) is the angle
between lines 1 and 2. It characterizes the bone supplementing additional
roofing by the cartilaginous convexity.

10-6 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 46-030370 REV 3


10-3 HIP Dysplasia
Calculation (continued)
The HIP Dysplasia calculation is used as follows:

Freeze the image and press CALC 2.


Calc 2


Use the ARROW key to select HIP.

1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 AFI 4 HIP


Press ENTER and line #1 will appear on the screen. Note that the line is
Enter
about 8 cm with a small gap to mark the center of the line. At one end will
be the number "1".

▼Rotation
Position line #1 using the TRACKBALL and the ROTATION knob. Position
T.B. the line as the baseline.


Press SET. Line #2 will appear on the screen. This line looks like #1 but has
Set a "2" labeled at one end of it. The Greek letter β (Beta) will appear halfway
between the labeled ends of lines 1 and 2, and the angle will be 55 degrees.

On the left hand side of the screen the results of angles ∝ and β will appear.

▼Rotation
Use the TRACKBALL and ROTATION KNOB to position Line #2.
T.B.


When you are satisfied with the position of line #2, press SET. Line #3 will
Set
appear. The Greek letter ∝ will appear halfway between lines 1 and 3 and
the angle will be 60˚.

▼Rotation
Use the TRACKBALL and ROTATION KNOB to position line #3 as the
T.B. Acetabulum Roof Line.


(continued)

46-030370 REV 3 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 10-7


10-3 HIP Dysplasia
Calculation (continued)


If you are not satisfied with any of the three line placements, you can
Set reactivate each line by pressing SET.

▼Rotation
Use the TRACKBALL and ROTATION KNOB to readjust the active line.
T.B.


When you are satisfied with the measurement and positions of the lines,
Meas press MEAS.

This ends the hip dysplasia mode calculations and stores the results on the
display for recording.

Press OFF to erase all measurements and measurement graphics.
Off

10-8 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 46-030370 REV 3


10-4 Estimated Fetal Body
Weight —Third
Calculation
When EFBW is selected from the Calc 2 function, EFBW calculations will be
displayed for three possible fetal body weights. The EFBW's will be labeled
#1, #2, #3.

Four lines will appear in the text scroll area on the left side of the display. It
will be formatted as shown below.

EFBW:

#1 9999
#2 9999
#3 9999

To display estimated fetal body weight:

DISPLAY

1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 AFI 4 HIP

Calc 2
Press CALC 2.

1 EDC 2 EFBW 3 AFI 4 HIP



Use the ARROW key to select "EFBW".


Enter Press ENTER. EFBW calculations will be displayed on the lower left portion
of the display.

46-030370 REV 3 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 10-9


10-5 Gestational Summary
Report Page

10-5-1 Overview
This section describes how to display, edit, and print a hardcopy of the
Gestational Report Page. It also explains dependent and independent data
fields, gestational age error markers and gestational age estimation.

Illustration 10-3
Gestational Report Page

EXAM DATE: 04/15/91


NAME: GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ID: AGE:
REFERRAL: LMP: GRAVIDA:
REFERRED FOR: PARA:

GESTATIONAL AGE CALCULATIONS

GA BY LMP: CEPHALIC INDEX: %


BPD(HADLOCK) CGA? N FL/BPD: %
OFD FL/AC: %
CRL(ROBINSON) CGA? N HC/AC: %
FL(O BRIEN) CGA? N EFBW:
HC(HADLOCK) CGA? N #1 (BPD,AC): GM
TAD #2 (FL,AC): GM
APD #3 (FL,AC,HC): GM
AC(HADLOCK) CGA? N HEART RATE: BPM
(TBL 2) CGA? N AFI: CM
(TBL 2) CGA? N / %
(TBL 2) CGA? N
(TBL 2) CGA? N
(TBL 2) CGA? N EDD BY LMP:
CGA: EDD BY CGA:
COMMENTS:

REPORTED BY: REPORT DATE:

10-10 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 46-030370 REV 3


10-5-2 Displaying and
Exiting the
Report Page
DISPLAY

CONTROL : ___
Control

CONTROL : G ___ or CONTROL : O ____


G O GESTATIONAL DATA/ OBSTETRICAL REPORT


R CONTROL : GR ___
GESTATIONAL DATA/REPORT PAGE


Displays the report page on the image screen. The keyboard responds
Enter
to editing commands.


Exits the report page. Returns to normal ultrasound display.
Control

10-5-3 Editing the


Report Page
The report page contains 17 edit fields. You edit the fields by entering
characters at the position marked by the alphanumeric cursor (a blinking
underscore). The characters you enter replace (type over) existing charac-
ters. You cannot insert characters into a field and shift characters to the right
of the cursor.

The RT 3200 checks numerical and data fields for validity when you move
the cursor to another field. If you enter illegal data, the RT3200 beeps and
the cursor remains in the offending field.

46-030370 REV 3 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 10-11


10-5-3 Editing the
Report Page
(continued)

Controlling Cursor Motion

Use the following keyboard keys or the TRACKBALL to move the cursor as
T.B. you edit a report page:

Press Shift, O ( ) to move the cursor to the first character position in the
Shift O preceding field.

Press Shift . (period) ( ) to move the cursor to the first character position
Shift .
in the next field. If the cursor is already in the last field on the page
(Comment Line 3), it will need to be moved with the TRACKBALL or the
Shift, O ( ) key.

Press Shift, L ( ) to move the cursor to the right one character position.
Shift L If the cursor is already at the last character position of the present field, the
cursor will advance to the first position of the next field.

Press Shift, K ( ) to move the cursor to the left one character position.
Shift K If the cursor is already at the first character position of the present field, it will
move to the first position of the prior field.

Press BS (Backspace) to erase the character to the left of the cursor and
BS move the cursor to the left one position. If the cursor is already at the
beginning of the current field, the BS key has no effect

The RETURN key works the same as the Shift . (period) ( ) key.
Return

Press any other alphanumeric keyboard key to enter a character into the
field at the cursor and move the cursor to the right one position. If the cursor
is already at the last character position of the present field, it will advance to
the first position of the next field.

10-12 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 46-030370 REV 3


10-5-4 Edit Fields
Any of the 18 report page edit fields described below can be edited.

Illustration 10-4
Edit Fields

EXAM DATE: 04/15/91


NAME: GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ID: AGE: 32
REFERRAL: DR. J. DOE LMP: 04/15/91 GRAVIDA: 2
REFERRED FOR: TWINS PARA: 2

GESTATIONAL AGE CALCULATIONS

GA BY LMP: CEPHALIC INDEX: %


BPD(HADLOCK) CGA? N FL/BPD: %
OFD FL/AC: %
CRL(ROBINSON) CGA? N HC/AC: %
FL(O BRIEN) CGA? N EFBW:
HC(HADLOCK) CGA? N #1 (BPD,AC): GM
TAD #2 (FL,AC): GM
APD #3 (FL,AC,HC): GM
AC(HADLOCK) CGA? N HEART RATE: BPM
(TBL 2) CGA? N AFI: cm
(TBL 2) CGA? N / %
(TBL 2) CGA? N
(TBL 2) CGA? N
(TBL 2) CGA? N EDD BY LMP:
CGA: EDD BY CGA:
COMMENTS: TYPE IN THREE LINES OF COMMENTS HERE.

REPORTED BY: REPORT DATE:

Referral
Enter the name of the referring physician, up to 16 characters long.

Referred for
Enter the reason for referral, up to 36 characters long.

Patient Age
Enter the age of the patient, using any two-digit integer. The number is used
only for presentation on the summary page. If you enter zero, the field
display is blank.

Last Menstrual Period (LMP)


Enter the date from the first day of the patient's last menstrual period prior
to pregnancy. Enter the date as: month (two digits), slash, day (two digits),
slash, year (in 2 or 4 digit format).

NOTE: Years 70-99 are interpreted as 1970-1999 and 00-69 are


interpreted as 2000-2069. If you use the four-digit format, the
system ignores the first two digits of the year.

EGA
Enter the estimated gestational age at the time of the examination. Enter the
weeks (two digits), followed by the letter "W", the days (one digit), followed
by the letter "D", i.e. 14W2D. This data is used to calculate the estimated
delivery date by EGA.

The formula used is: EDD by EGA = current date + (40 weeks - EGA)

46-030370 REV 3 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 10-13


10-5-4 Edit Fields
(continued)

Gravida
Enter the number of pregnancies of the patient. This number may be any
integer, and is used only for presentation on the summary page. If you enter
zero, the field display is blank.

Para
Enter the number of deliveries of the patient, using any two-digit integer. The
number is used only for presentation on the summary page. If you enter
zero, the field display is blank.

[Include BPD in] CGA?


[Include CRL in] CGA?
[Include FL in] CGA?
[Include HC in] CGA?
[Include AC in] CGA?
[Include (5) User Program-
mable Tables in] CGA?
These ten flags specify which gestational ages should be used to calculate
the Composite Gestation Age (CGA). Enter one of the three characters:

Y Include this GA in the CGA.


N Do not include this GA in the CGA.
D Delete this GA measurement from the summary page. This
response clears the result fields (millimeters and GA) and loses the
measurement data and any ratio calculations involved.

NOTE: "N" shows up by factory default if no measurements have been


entered.

"Y" automatically replaces "N" once a measurement has been


entered.

Selecting "D" is reversible if the measurement has not been


deleted from the averaging page.

Comments (line 1)
Comments (line 2)
Comments (line 3)
Three lines of comments can be entered, each containing up to 64
alphanumeric characters.

10-14 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 46-030370 REV 3


10-5-5 Independent Data
Fields
The independent data fields hold the key measurement data. These fields
are not affected by any editing function in the report page display (except that
you can delete gestational age measurement data from the report page).

Illustration 10-5
Independent Data Fields

EXAM DATE: 04/15/91


NAME: JANE DOE GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ID: 123-45-6789 AGE:
REFERRAL: LMP: GRAVIDA:
REFERRED FOR: PARA:

GESTATIONAL AGE CALCULATIONS

GA BY LMP: CEPHALIC INDEX: 70%


BPD(HADLOCK) 52mm 21W6D CGA? Y FL/BPD: 73%
OFD 75mm FL/AC: 27%
CRL(ROBINSON) 22mm 09W0D CGA? Y HC/AC: 123%
FL(O BRIEN) 38mm 21W3D CGA? Y EFBW:
HC(HADLOCK) 171mm 19W3D CGA? Y #1 (BPD,AC): 364GM
TAD #2 (FL,AC): 375GM
APD #3 (FL,AC,HC,): GM
AC(HADLOCK) 139mm 19W0D CGA? Y HEART RATE: 125BPM
TEST1 (TBL 2) 52mm 20W4D CGA? Y AFI: 180CM
TEST2 (TBL 2) 75mm 21W1D CGA? Y 52 / 75 70%
(TBL 2) CGA? N
(TBL 2) CGA? N
(TBL 2) CGA? N EDD BY LMP:
CGA: 18W1D EDD BY CGA:
COMMENTS:

REPORTED BY: REPORT DATE:

Hospital Name
The hospital name is the same sixteen characters appearing in the upper left
corner of the B-Mode display. Use the CONTROL, H function to enter the
hospital name.

Patient Name
Use the ID/NAME key to enter the patient name.

Patient ID
Use the ID/NAME key to enter a patient identification number.

Exam Date
The exam date on the report page is the date on the system clock.

BPD, mm
GA by BPD
BPD Table Author
BPD is the biparietal diameter last measured. GA by BPD is the gestational
age computed from the last biparietal diameter or averaged. BPD Table
Author is the author of the table used in the gestational age computation.

The GA by BPD may be estimated using OB TBL 1, menu level 1, or the user
programmed OB TBL 2, menu level 1, 2, or 3.

The author field will show Hadlock for OB TBL 1, or the user programmed
title from OB TBL 2.

46-030370 REV 3 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 10-15


10-5-5 Independent Data
Fields (continued)

OFD
OFD is the occipital-frontal diameter. It is obtained if a head circumference
is measured by the two-diameter method. The OFD is the second distance
measured.

CRL, mm
GA by CRL
CRL Table Author
CRL is the crown-lump length last measured. GA by CRL is the gestational
age computed from the last crown-rump length or averaged. CRL Table
Author is the author of the table used in the gestational age computation.

The GA by CRL may be estimated using OB TBL 1, menu level 2, or the


user programmed OB TBL 2, menu level 1, 2, or 3.

The author field will show Robinson for OB TBL 1 or the user programmed
title from OB TBL 2.

FL. mm
GA by FL
FL Table Author
FL is the femur length last measured. GA by FL is the gestational age
computed from the last femur length or averaged. FL Table Author is the
author of the table used in the gestational age computation.

The GA by FL may be estimated using OB TBL 1, menu level 3, or the user


programmed OB TBL 2, menu level 1, 2, or 3.

The author field will show O'Brien for OB TBL 1 or the user programmed
title from TBL 2.

AC, mm
GA by AC
AC Table Author
AC is the abdominal circumference last measured. GA by AC is the
gestational age computed from the last abdominal circumference or aver-
aged. AC Table Author is the author of the table used in the gestational age
computation.

The GA by AC may be estimated using OB TBL 1, menu level 4, or the user


programmed OB TBL 2, menu level 4 or 5.

The author field will show Hadlock for OB TBL 1 or the user programmed
title from OB TBL 2.

10-16 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 46-030370 REV 3


10-5-5 Independent Data
Fields (continued)

HC, mm
GA by HC
HC Table Author
HC is the head circumference last measured. GA by HC is the gestational
age computed from the last head circumference or averaged. HC Table
Author is the author of the table used in the gestational age computation.

The GA by HC may be estimated using OB TBL 1, menu level 5, or the user


programmed OB TBL 2, menu level 4 or 5.

The author field will show Hadlock for OB TBL 1 or the user programmed
title from OB TBL 2.

TAD
APD
TAD is the transverse abdominal diameter. APD is the abdominal anterior-
posterior diameter. Both are obtained only when the abdominal circumfer-
ence are measured by the two-diameter method. TAD is the first distance
measured and APD is the second.

Cephalic Index
The cephalic index is the ratio of the two diameters used in the measurement
of the head circumference, according to the formula:

Cephalic index (%) = 100 * BPD/OFD. Cephalic index's normal value is


79±8%.

NOTE: The BPD used in the calculation of cephalic index is obtained


in the measurement of head circumference by two diameters,
and may be different from the value used for estimation of
gestational age and displayed on the summary page.

If the head circumference by two diameters measurement has not been


performed, the cephalic index field is blank.

FL/BPD
FL/BPD is the ratio of femur length to biparietal diameter, in percent. The
displayed values are used for the calculation. If either is missing, the field
is blank. (For OB TBL 1 only.) FL/BPD's normal ratio is 79±8% (23 weeks
to term).

FL/AC
FL/AC is the ratio of femur length to abdominal circumference, in percent.
The displayed FL and AC values are used for the calculation. If either is
missing, the field is blank. (For OB TBL 1 only.) FL/AC's normal ratio is
22±2% (21 weeks to term).

HC/AC
HC/AC is the ratio of head circumference to abdominal circumference, in
percent. The displayed HC and AC values are used for the calculation. If
either is missing, the field is blank. (For OB TBL 1 only.) HC/AC's normal
ratio varies throughout the pregnancy.

46-030370 REV 3 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 10-17


10-5-5 Independent Data
Fields (continued)

#1 Estimated Fetal Body


Weight (AC/BPD)
The Estimated Fetal Body Weight #1, is computed using a Shepard/
Richards/Berkowitz model. An evaluation of two equations for predicting
weight by ultrasound. (Shepard et al., Am. J. Obstet. Gynecol., 142:47-54,
1982).

EFBW is determined according to the equation:

LOG 10 (EFBW) = 3 - 1.7492 + 0.0166*BPD + 0.0046*AC -


0.00002646*AC*BPD

The above formula yields EFBW in kilograms when the AC and BPD are in
centimeters. (The machine automatically makes the conversion from
kilograms to grams and millimeters to centimeters.) (For OB TBL 1 only)

When EFBW is selected, this calculation is made only if AC and BPD


measurements have already been made. Otherwise, the EFBW (BPD, AC)
field to the left on the screen will display U.F. and will be blank in the report
page.

#2 Estimated Fetal Body


Weight (FL/AC)
The Estimated Fetal Body Weight #2 (EFBW) is computed using the
Hadlock Model. (Hadlock, F.B., et al,: Sonographic Estimation of Fetal
Weight, Radiology, 150:535-40, 1984.)

EFBW is determined according to the equation:

LOG10 (EFBW) = 1.3598 + 0.01844*FL + 0.0051*AC - 0.000037*AC*FL

The above formula yields EFBW in grams when the AC and FL are in
millimeters. (The machine automatically makes the conversion from kilo-
grams to grams and millimeters to centimeters.) (For use with OB Table 1
gestational ages only.)

When EFBW is selected, this calculation is made only if AC and FL


measurements have already been made. Otherwise, the EFBW (FL, AC)
field to the left on the screen will display U.F. and will be blank on the report
page.

10-18 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 46-030370 REV 3


10-5-5 Independent Data
Fields (continued)

#3 Estimated Fetal Body


Weight (FL/AC/HC)
The Estimated Fetal Body Weight #3 (EFBW) is computed using the Hadlock,
Harris, Sharman, Deter and Park model. ("Estimation of fetal weight with the
use of head, body and femur measurements—A perspective study." Ameri-
can Journal of Obstetrics and Gynecology, 151:333-337, 1985.)

EFBW is determined according to the equation:

LOG10 (EFBW) = 1.326 - 0.0000326*AC*FL + 0.00107*HC + 0.00438*AC +


0.0158*FL

The above formula yield EFBW in grams when the FL, AC, and HC
measurements are in millimeters. (The machine automatically makes the
conversion from kilograms to grams and millimeters to centimeters) (For OB
TBL 1 only).

When EFBW is selected, this calculation is made only if the FL, AC, and HC
measurement have been made. Otherwise, the EFBW #3 field to the left on
the screen will display U.F. and will be blank on the Report Page.

NOTE: If BPD, FL and AC measurements have already been made,


then both EFBW (BPD,AC) and EFBW (FL,AC) values will be
displayed to the left on the screen and in the report page.

Calculations are made from the last measurement entered or


averaged.

Heart Rate
This is the fetal heart rate, in beats per minute, computed in the CALC 1
function, menu level 3. If this measurement is not made, the field is blank.

Amniotic Fluid Index


The Amniotic Fluid Index is determined by taking a distance measurement of
the amniotic fluid depth in each of four axial quadrants. These four measure-
ments are added together to formulate the Amniotic Fluid Index (AFI).

Normal values are considered to be:

Dr. Rutherford/Dr. Phelan, Obstetrics & Gynecology, Volume 70, No. 3, Part
1, p. 353-6, Sept. 1987.

36 - 40 weeks
0 - 5 cm = very low 5.1 - 8.0 cm = low
8.1 - 18.0 cm = normal > 18.0 cm = high

Dr. C. S. Smith, The Female Patient, Volume 15, p. 85-97, March 1990.

28 - 40 weeks
15.0 cm = average
> 20.0 - 24.0 = Hydramnios
< 5.0 - 6.0 = Oligohydramnios

46-030370 REV 3 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 10-19


10-5-6 Dependent Data
Fields
The report page contains four fields which are dependent on edit fields.

Table 10-1
Dependent Data Fields

Field Dependent On

GA by LMP Last menstrual period


EDD by LMP Last menstrual period
CGA Include XXX* in CGA? (five fields)
EDD by CGA Include XXX* in CGA? (five fields)

*XXX = BPD, CLR, FL, AC or HC.

Illustration 10-6
Dependent Data Fields

EXAM DATE: 04/15/91


NAME: GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ID: AGE:
REFERRAL: LMP: GRAVIDA:
REFERRED FOR: PARA:

GESTATIONAL AGE CALCULATIONS

GA BY LMP: 20W3D CEPHALIC INDEX: %


BPD(HADLOCK) CGA? N FL/BPD: %
OFD FL/AC: %
CRL(ROBINSON) CGA? N HC/AC: %
FL(O BRIEN) CGA? N EFBW:
HC(HADLOCK) CGA? N #1 (BPD,AC): GM
TAD #2 (FL,AC): GM
APD #3 (FL,AC,HC): GM
AC(HADLOCK) CGA? N HEART RATE: BPM
(TBL 2) CGA? N AFI: CM
(TBL 2) CGA? N / %
(TBL 2) CGA? N
(TBL 2) CGA? N
(TBL 2) CGA? N EDD BY LMP: 15 NOV 1991
CGA: 20W3D EDD BY CGA: 21 NOV 1991
COMMENTS:

REPORTED BY: REPORT DATE:

The first two fields are updated whenever you change the LMP date.
The last two fields are updated whenever you change any of the Yes/No
fields determining which gestational ages are included in the Composite
Gestational Age. The fields are computed as defined below:

GA by LMP
GA by LMP is computed from the date of the first day of the Last Men-
strual Period, according to the formula:

GA = {exam date} - {last menstrual period}

EDD by LMP
EDD by LMP is the Estimated Delivery Date computed from the date of
the first day of the Last Menstrual Period according to the formula:

EDD = {last menstrual period} + 280 days

10-20 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 46-030370 REV 3


10-5-6 Dependent Data
Fields (continued)

CGA
CGA, the Composite Gestational Age, is the arithmetic mean of gestational
ages computed from the selected measurements. If the [Include XXX in]
CGA? field (labeled CGA? on the report page) contains a Y, the correspond-
ing measurement is included in the CGA. Otherwise, it is not included in the
average.

EDD by CGA
EDD by CGA is the Estimated Delivery Date computed from Composite
Gestational Age according to the formula:

EDD = {exam date} - CGA + 280 days.

EDD by EGA
EDD by EGA is the estimated delivery date computed from the Estimated
Gestational Age at the time of the exam. The formula is:

EDD by EGA = current date = (40 weeks - EGA)

10-5-7 Gestational Age


Error Markers
Whenever three or more gestational age measurements are included in the
CGA (the arithmetic mean of the included gestational ages), an arrow may
appear on the report page to mark the GA which is farthest from the CGA.
This arrow is immediately to the right of the gestational age. This makes it
easy to spot the outlying measurement. If there is a tie between two or more
GAs for the outlying measurement, no arrow will appear. When a hardcopy
print of the screen is made using the RECORD key, the error marker arrow
is temporarily erased and does not appear on the print.
Illustration 10-7
Error Markers

EXAM DATE: 04/15/91


NAME: JANE DOE GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ID: 123-45-6789 AGE: 32
REFERRAL: DR. J. DOE LMP: 12 JAN 1991 GRAVIDA: 2
REFERRED FOR: TWINS PARA: 2

GESTATIONAL AGE CALCULATIONS

GA BY LMP: CEPHALIC INDEX: 70%


BPD(HADLOCK) 52mm 21W6D CGA? Y FL/BPD: 73%
OFD 75mm FL/AC: 27%
CRL(ROBINSON) 22mm 09W0D CGA? Y HC/AC: 123%
FL(O BRIEN) 38mm 21W3D CGA? Y EFBW:
HC(HADLOCK) 171mm 19W3D CGA? Y #1 (BPD,AC): 364GM
TAD #2 (FL,AC): 375GM
APD #3 (FL,AC,HC): 370GM
AC(HADLOCK) 139mm 19W0D CGA? Y HEART RATE: 125BPM
TEST1 (TBL 2) 52mm 20W4D CGA? Y AFI: 180CM
TEST2 (TBL 2) 75mm 21W1D CGA? Y 52 / 75 70%
(TBL 2) CGA? N
(TBL 2) CGA? N
(TBL 2) CGA? N EDD BY LMP:
CGA: 18W1D EDD BY CGA:
COMMENTS:

REPORTED BY: REPORT DATE:

46-030370 REV 3 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 10-21


10-5-8 Hardcopy Output
of the Report
Page
The RT 3200 Advantage - III video printer generates hardcopy prints. To
print the report, press the RECORD key when the report page is on display.

When you press RECORD, the system modifies the displayed report page
before starting the recording process. First, it erases the gestational age
error marker (the arrow which may appear to the right of a gestational age).
Then, it draws solid white areas at the bottom of the report page. These bars
provide white space on the hardcopy print for your signature and date. After
the exposure, the system erases the bars and restores and GA error marker.

When your RT 3200 Advantage - III is connected to an IBM (or compatible)


computer via the RS-232 Serial Port, and the Report Page is displayed, the
RECORD key will transmit the measurement data on the Report Page to the
computer. When you press RECORD, the data is transmitted and an
Acknowledge will display in the Reported By area to confirm the transmis-
sion of data has been received by the computer.

Illustration 10-8
Report Page Ready to Print

EXAM DATE: 04/15/91


NAME: JANE DOE GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ID: 123-45-6789 AGE:
REFERRAL: LMP: GRAVIDA:
REFERRED FOR: PARA:

GESTATIONAL AGE CALCULATIONS

GA BY LMP: CEPHALIC INDEX: 70%


BPD(HADLOCK) 52mm 21W6D CGA? Y FL/BPD: 73%
OFD 75mm FL/AC: 27%
CRL(ROBINSON) 22mm 09W0D CGA? Y HC/AC: 123%
FL(O BRIEN) 38mm 21W3D CGA? Y EFBW:
HC(HADLOCK) 171mm 19W3D CGA? Y #1 (BPD,AC): 364GM
TAD #2 (FL,AC): 375GM
APD #3 (FL,AC,HC): 370GM
AC(HADLOCK) 139mm 19W0D CGA? Y HEART RATE: 125BPM
TEST1 (TBL 2) 52mm 20W4D CGA? Y AFI: 180CM
TEST2 (TBL 2) 75mm 21W1D CGA? Y 52 / 75 70%
(TBL 2) CGA? N
(TBL 2) CGA? N
(TBL 2) CGA? N EDD BY LMP:
CGA: 18W1D EDD BY CGA:
COMMENTS: TYPE IN THREE LINES OF COMMENTS HERE.

REPORTED BY: REPORT DATE:

10-22 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 46-030370 REV 3


10-5-9 Gestational Age
Estimation

NOTE: To obtain the circumference for GA estimation, use the Trace/


Area function, the two-diameter method or the ellipse
measurement.

"Y" (yes) use this measurement for CGA


"N" (no) do not use this measurement for CGA
"D" (delete) erase or delete this measurement

NOTE: Selecting "D" (Delete) will erase the measurement from the
report page. However, as long as the measurements are not
deleted from the averaging page it can be recalled by entering
a "Y".

Illustration 10-9
Gestational Age Estimation

EXAM DATE: 04/15/91


NAME: JANE DOE GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ID: 123-45-6789 AGE: 32
REFERRAL: DR. J. DOE LMP: 12 OCT 1989 GRAVIDA: 2
REFERRED FOR: TWINS PARA: 2

GESTATIONAL AGE CALCULATIONS

GA BY LMP: CEPHALIC INDEX: 70%


BPD(HADLOCK) 52mm 21W6D CGA? Y FL/BPD: 73%
OFD 75mm FL/AC: 27%
CRL(ROBINSON) 22mm 09W0D CGA? Y HC/AC: 123%
FL(O BRIEN) 38mm 21W3D CGA? Y EFBW:
HC(HADLOCK) 171mm 19W3D CGA? Y #1 (BPD,AC): 364GM
TAD #2 (FL,AC): 375GM
APD #3 (FL, AC,HC): 370GM
AC(HADLOCK) 139mm 19W0D CGA? Y HEART RATE: 125BPM
TEST1 (TBL 2) 52mm 20W4D CGA? Y AFI: 180CM
TEST2 (TBL 2) 75mm 21W1D CGA? Y 52 / 75 70%
(TBL 2) CGA? N
(TBL 2) CGA? N
(TBL 2) CGA? N EDD BY LMP:
CGA: 18W1D EDD BY CGA:
COMMENTS:

REPORTED BY: REPORT DATE:

46-030370 REV 3 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 10-23


10-5-9 Gestational Age
Estimation
(continued)
If you selected menu level 4 (AC), the transverse diameter is stored as the
TAD, and the anterior-posterior diameter is stored as the APD, both of which
are shown on the report page.

If you selected menu level 5 (HC), the system uses the anterior-posterior
diameter to compute cephalic index. BPD is not shown on the report page
unless you enter a separate BPD estimation. The occipito-frontal diameter
is stored as the OFD, which is shown on the report page and used in the
computation of the cephalic index.

NOTE: The OB TBL 1 or OB TBL 2 function identifies and stores the


diameter and circumference data as pertaining to either the
head or abdomen.

There are three possible sources for the circumference data used to
estimate gestational age by HC or AC. The first is a circumference by using
the TRACE/AREA function. The second is a circumference by computing
two diameters. The third is the ellipse measurement.

10-5-10 Measurement
Averaging Page
The Measurement Averaging Page enables the display and selection of
measurement values that will be included or excluded from the data to be
used in the calculation of results displayed on the main OB Report Page. For
more details, refer to Section 10-7.

10-24 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 46-030370 REV 3


10-6 Report Page Sequencing

Illustration 10-10
Report Page Sequencing

OB Measurement Anatomical User


Report Averaging Survey Comments
Page Page Page Library

OB Report Page Display Sequence

Urology User
Report Comments
Page Library

Urology Report Page Sequence

GYN IVF User


Report Report Comments
Page Page Library

GYN/IVF Report Page Sequence

Function
OB OB
Tbl 1 Tbl 2

Calc 1 Calc 2

Calc 3 Map

To move from page to page, use the LEFT/RIGHT ARROW key at the
bottom of the Function Key group. Page selections wrap around from end
to end by repeatedly pressing an arrow key, right or left.

46-030370 REV 3 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 10-25


10-7 Measurement Averaging
Page

10-7-1 Overview
The Measurement Averaging Page enables the display and selection of
measurement values that will be included or excluded from the data to be
used in the calculation of results displayed on the main OB Report Page.

Illustration 10-11
Measurement Averaging Page

EXAM DATE: 04/15/91


NAME: GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ID: AVERAGE ALL? Y
PRE-PROGRAMMED TABLES USER-PROGRAMED TABLES
1 2 3 AVE 1 2 3 AVE
BPD

USE? N N N USE? N N N

CRL

USE? N N N USE? N N N

FL

USE? N N N USE? N N N

HC

USE? N N N USE? N N N

AC

USE? N N N USE? N N N

OTHER MEASUREMENTS TAD


USE? N N N
OFD APD
USE? N N N USE? N N N

10-7-2 The Report


Display
Measurement results for each of the five factory programmed tables from
OB TBL 1 and the five user programmed tables from OB TBL 2 are
displayed. For each of the ten tables the current measurement, two prior
measurements and the computed gestational age for that table is displayed.
(The average is the mean measurement value and the gestational age is
computed from that mean value.)

OFD<TAD<APD are displayed and made available for averaging at the


bottom of the screen. Under each gestational age calculation is a flag which
determines if the measurement shall be included in the average for the main
report page. The choices to be entered here are:

"Y" (yes) use this measurement for averaging


"N" (no) do not use this measurement for averaging
"D" (delete) erase or delete this measurement

NOTE: Selecting "D" (delete) is irreversible. If there is no measurement


with a "Y", the average will not be displayed.

10-26 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 46-030370 REV 3


10-7-3 Editing the Page
Move about the Averaging Page in the same manner as the Main OB Report
Page. Use the TRACKBALL, SHIFT and ARROW keys or the Return key.

Only the flag fields can be edited. You can not edit any of the measurements
displayed on this page.

You can, however, choose to exclude or delete specific measurements by


using "N" or "D" in the flag field.

10-7-4 Average All


The default state for the measurement flag fields is selected by the
"AVERAGE ALL" field. The AVERAGE ALL field is non-volatile and will be
remembered even after power down.

If the AVERAGE ALL field is "N" (no), then the default for the current
measurement is "Y" (yes) and the two prior measurements will be "N" (no).
"No" is the factory and service default setting for the AVERAGE ALL field.
If the measurement Averaging Page is never used, the AVERAGE ALL
selection is likely to be "N" (no).

If the AVERAGE ALL field is set to "Y" (yes), the default for all measurement
fields will be "Y" (yes). It is assumed that all measurements (up to three) will
be averaged as a matter of regular procedure.

46-030370 REV 3 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 10-27


10-8 Anatomical Survey
Report Page
The Anatomical Survey Page provides a checklist that promotes routine
thorough reporting of obstetrical ultrasound exams. To reach the Anatomi-
cal Survey Page, use the function ARROW keys. Refer to Illustration 10-10.

For each of the nine pre-programmed and up to four user programmed


anatomical features, the operator is prompted to indicate whether the
feature was imaged (yes/no) and the feature's appearance (normal/abnor-
mal).

Illustration 10-12
Anatomical Survey Summary

EXAM DATE: 04/15/91


NAME: GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ID:
REFERRAL: LMP: GRAVIDA:
REFERRED FOR: PARA:

ANATOMICAL SURVEY

IMAGED? APPEARANCE

HEAD YES NO NORMAL ABNORMAL


FOUR CHAMBER VIEW YES NO NORMAL ABNORMAL
SPINE YES NO NORMAL ABNORMAL
STOMACH YES NO NORMAL ABNORMAL
KIDNEYS YES NO NORMAL ABNORMAL
CORD INSERTION YES NO NORMAL ABNORMAL
BLADDER YES NO NORMAL ABNORMAL
UPPER EXTREMITIES YES NO NORMAL ABNORMAL
LOWER EXTREMITIES YES NO NORMAL ABNORMAL
YES NO NORMAL ABNORMAL
YES NO NORMAL ABNORMAL
YES NO NORMAL ABNORMAL
YES NO NORMAL ABNORMAL
COMMENTS:

REPORTED BY: REPORT DATE:

10-8-1 Page Description


At the top of the Anatomical Survey Page is patient data similar to the main
OB Report Page (the difference is the age parameter). This information can
NOT be edited on the Anatomical Survey Page. The operator must edit this
information on the main OB Report Page display.

When the Anatomical Survey Page is enabled, the cursor will appear at the
"yes/no" field of the first feature on the checklist.

Both "yes" and "no" will be displayed for each item on the checklist. The
words "normal" and "abnormal" are not initially displayed.

10-28 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 46-030370 REV 3


10-8-2 Editing the Page
The "yes" or "no" is selected for the active anatomical feature by pressing
a "Y" for yes or "N" for no on the alphanumeric keyboard.

If "yes" is selected, then the "no" will be erased. The words "normal" and
"abnormal" will appear on the line to the right. The cursor will automatically
move to the "normal/abnormal" field.

If the feature appears normal, press "n" on the keyboard and the word
"abnormal" is erased.

In either case, the cursor will move to the "yes/no" field for the next item on
the checklist.

Continue to edit each pre-programmed and user programmed feature.

If "no" is selected, then the "yes" will be erased. The cursor will move to the
"yes/no" field for the next item on the checklist.

10-8-3 Comments
The operator can enter comments into the three line comment field at the
bottom of the screen.

This field is identical to the comment field that appears at the bottom of the
main OB Report Page.

If changes are made in either page, they will automatically appear in the
other as well.

10-8-4 User Programmed


Features
The operator can add up to four additional anatomical features to the list.
Items are added by moving the cursor to the 20 character name field and
entering the text.

Whether the name field is blank or not, the item is included in the list and the
"yes/no" entries appear on the "IMAGED?" column.

The user programmed anatomical features will be stored in non-volatile


memory and will be saved even after the scanner is powered down.

46-030370 REV 3 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 10-29


10-9 User Programmable
Comments Library

10-9-1 Overview
A User Programmable Comments Library is available to assist the operator
in entering frequently used words and phrases. These words or phrases
may be used often in annotating a scan image or commenting on a report
page such as the OB, Urology or Anatomical Survey Reports.

Illustration 10-13
User Programmable Comments
Library

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
USER PROGRAMMABLE COMMENTS LIBRARY

CODE TEXT

XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

10-9-2 Selecting the


Comments
Library
To use this feature, you must first enter one of the Report Page sequences.
Press CONTROL, O to enter the OB Report sequence. Press CONTROL,
U to enter the Urology Page sequence. To reach the Library, use the
function ARROW keys. Refer to Illustration 10-13 for an example of the
Programmable Comments Library Page.

Each Report Page sequence has a user programmable comments library


page. These are the SAME comments library. There is only one comments
library page common to all applications of the RT 3200 Advantage - III.

10-30 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 46-030370 REV 3


10-9-3 Programming
Comments

Control O

Select the OB Report sequence, Urology Report sequence or GYN/IVF


Control U Report Sequence.

Control M


Select the AVERAGING PAGE, ANATOMICAL SURVEY and USER COM-
MENTS LIBRARY with the ARROW keys. The cursor will be at the first
character position of the first code field.


Alphanumeric Enter the desired code, using up to four letters.
Keyboard


Press RETURN. The cursor then moves to the text string field.
Return


Alphanumeric Enter the desired text string, using up to forty characters.
Keyboard


Press RETURN. The cursor moves to the code field of the second line.
Return


Continue entering your code and text in the above fashion.
Control
If you need to move a specific line in the comments library, using the
TRACKBALL or SHIFT and the ARROW keys on the alphanumeric
keyboard.

When you have completed entering your comments, press CONTROL to


exit the Report Page sequence and exit the control function.

46-030370 REV 3 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 10-31


10-9-4 Editing the
Comments
Library

To edit the Comments Library, select the OB, GYN/IVF or Urology Summary
Control O Report sequence.

Control U

Control M


Use the function ARROW keys to select the Programmable Comments
Library page.


Directional Use the TRACKBALL or KEYBOARD ARROW keys to select the appropri-
T.B. Keys ate comment line.


Alphanumeric Enter a new four character code word if necessary.
Keyboard


Press RETURN or move the TRACKBALL to store that code word. The
T.B. Return cursor will move to the text field.


Alphanumeric Enter the new forty character maximum text field desired.
Keyboard


Press RETURN or move the TRACKBALL to store the new text words.
T.B. Return
Repeat as necessary to edit the desired comment lines.

Press the CONTROL key to exit the report page function and exit the control
Control function.

10-32 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 46-030370 REV 3


10-9-5 Using the
Comments
Library
Comment text from the library can be inserted on to the ultrasound image
display as well as in the comment field of the OB Report Page, Urology
Report Page, Anatomical Summary Page, GYN Report Page and IVF
Report Page.

To place comments in the Report page, you must display that report page
and move the cursor down to the appropriate spot in the comment field.

To place comments on the ultrasound image, press the COMMENT key


while in the comment mode.

Once you have moved the cursor to the appropriate spot in the image or
report page, type in the code word (maximum four characters). Press
ENTER. The comments library will be searched for the code word. If the
code word is found, the code is overwritten by the text string on the image
or report page. The text will wrap at the right margin, just as if you had
entered it from the keyboard.

NOTE: If you are using more than one pre-programmed comment


consecutively, be sure to place a space between each comment
selection.

Code characters must be entered by the keyboard. Preexisting characters


or text will not be appended to keyboard input to form a code.

Example: Suppose the comment field contains the text


"PQRSTUVWXYZ". The user positions the cursor after
the "Z" and enters "AB" and presses ENTER. The system
will search the library for the code "AB", not "YZAB". If the
code "AB" is found, only the "AB" will be replaced with text
from the library.

10-9-6 No Code
If no code is found in the comment library, the system will react in two
different ways.

If you are in the Comment Mode the system assumes that the characters
preceding the ENTER were normal text. It assumes the user pressed
ENTER in order to exit the Comment Mode and make the keyboard entries
permanent. Thus an exit will be performed.

If you are in the comment field of a Report Page, the code search failure is
recognized as an error. The system will beep and the code entered remains
on the comment field.

46-030370 REV 3 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 10-33


10-10 Urology Summary
Report Page

10-10-1 Overview
The Urology Summary Report Page is provided to improve productivity and
facilitate consistency in Urology procedures.

Illustration 10-14
Urology Summary Page Report

EXAM DATE: 04/15/91


PATIENT DATA GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS

NAME:
ID: AGE:

REFERRAL:
REFERRED FOR:

AP: XXXXXXXXXXXX
PSA: XXXXXXXXXXXX
PPSA: BASED ON VOLUME 1
DRE: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXX: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

VOLUME #1 #####.# cm3 ✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳


VOLUME #2 #####.# cm3 ✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳
VOLUME #3 #####.# cm3 ✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳✳
BIOPSY
LESION SITE: 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX YES NO
2 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX YES NO
3 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX YES NO
4 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX YES NO
COMMENTS:

REPORTED BY: REPORT DATE:

The Urology Report Page contains patient data information, measurement


results of three volumes, specific exam comments, lesion site comments
and general comments.

The Patient Name and ID can not be edited on this report page. They were
entered prior to the start of the exam by using the ID/NAME key.

There are three fields in which measured volumes are reported. These
volumes are obtained from the volume measurements taken in the CALC
1 and/or CALC 2 menus. The first volume measurement taken is recorded
as Volume #1. The second and third measurements are recorded as
Volume #2 and Volume #3, respectively.

The system will store the three most recent volume measurements. If a
fourth volume measurement is made, Volume #1 is erased. Volume #2
becomes #1. Volume #3 becomes #2 and the forth measurement is Volume
#3. The very first measurement is lost.

In the space to the right of each volume measurement, the user can type in
comments pertinent to that particular volume measurement.

NOTE: If the volume measurements were taken in the CALC 2 STVOL


(stepper volume) selection, the word "STEPPER" will appear in
the comment line to the right of the volume measurement.

10-34 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 46-030370 REV 3


10-10-2 Urology Page
Edit Fields
The following fields on the Urology Report Page may be edited while it is
displayed. Use the TRACKBALL, SHIFT plus ARROW or RETURN keys
to move to the desired field to be edited. See Illustration 10-14 for the
location of the edit fields (listed below) on the Urology Report Page.

Age: The patient age (3 digits)


Referral: Name of the referring physician (16 characters)
Referred for: Reason for the Exam (36 characters)
AP: Alkaline Phosphatase concentration (12 characters)
PSA: Prostatic Specific Antigen concentration (12 charac-
ters)
PPSA: On the PPSA line is a non-edit field that corresponds to
the calculation result.
The edit field following the words "BASED ON VOL-
UME," is a single digit (1, 2, or 3) to indicate which
volume measurement (corresponding to the entire
gland) is used to calculate the PPSA. The volume
chosen is multiplied by the value (0.12 or 0.15) used as
the threshold level. (It is based on standard production
of PSA per gram of volume of prostatic tissue.)
Example: volume of 17.6 x .12 = a 2.1 PPSA.
Predicted PSA=Volume (grams) x 0.12 ng/ml/g.
DRE: Digital Rectal Exam results (57 characters)
XXX: Optional User Specific field (3 character name, 57
character text)
Volume 1-3: Comment line, to the right of each measurement can
be used to describe the volume measurement. (40
characters maximum in each line).
Lesion Site: Description of each of four lesion sites (4 fields, 20
characters each)
Biopsy: Indicated whether the lesion site was biopsied. Enter
"Y" for yes and "N" for no.
Comments: General comments and findings (248 characters in 4
lines).

46-030370 REV 3 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 10-35


10-10-3 Display Urology
Report Page
Control U

This control function is used to display the Urology Report Page se-
quence.
DISPLAY

CONTROL : ___
Control Press the CONTROL key.


CONTROL : U___
U UROLOGIC REPORT


Press the ENTER key to display the Urology Report Page.
Enter

Press CONTROL again to exit the Report Page function.

10-11 Record Output—Line


Printer Control R L

This Control function selects to modify the output video when the RECORD
key is pressed if a gamma correction curve is used. CONTROL, R, L
disables the gamma correction curve for summary report printing.

DISPLAY
CONTROL : ___
Control


CONTROL : R ___
R RECORD OUTPUT


CONTROL : RL___
L RECORD OUTPUT/SELECT LINE PRINTER
(Gamma correction curve will not be used when RECORD is pressed. System
beeps after record process has started.)

Press the ENTER key.
Enter

NOTE: CONTROL, R, L is used for summary report printing only.

10-36 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 46-030370 REV 3


10-12 Prostate Body Marker
Patterns
Additional prostate body marker patterns are added for urology exams.

Illustration 10-15
Prostate Body Marker Patterns

PACKAGE D
Prostate Patterns-Inverted

PACKAGE E
Prostate Patterns

46-030370 REV 3 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 10-37


10-13 Calc 3
Provides two sets of calculations for GYN and IVF evaluations. Results are
displayed on the GYN and IVF Summary Report Pages, respectively.

GYN—Allows for the measurement of the cervix, endometrium, uterus, right


ovary and left ovary. Measurements are entered on the GYN Summary
Report Page (see Illustration 10-16) and the volume of the organ is
calculated.

IVF—Allows for the measurement of up to six follicles in the right ovary and
six follicles in the left ovary. The measurements are recorded on the IVF
Summary Report Page (see Illustration 10-17) where the mean diameter
and volume are calculated for each follicle measured.
Illustration 10-16
GYN Report Page

EXAM DATE: 08/15/92


NAME: GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ID: AGE:
REFERRAL: LMP: GRAVIDA:
REFERRED FOR: PARA:

GYN REPORT

L (cm) W (cm) H (cm) VOL (cm 3 ) COMMENTS

CERVIX

ENDOMETRIUM

UTERUS

RIGHT OVARY

LEFT OVARY

COMMENTS:

REPORTED BY: REPORT DATE:

Illustration 10-17
IVF Report Page

EXAM DATE: 08/15/92


NAME: GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
ID: AGE:
REFERRAL: LMP: GRAVIDA:
REFERRED FOR: PARA:

FERTILITY REPORT
RIGHT OVARY FOLLICLES LEFT OVARY FOLLICLES
DIAMETERS (mm) VOL DIAMETERS (mm) VOL
+ x MEAN (cm 3) + x MEAN (cm 3 )
1
* 1
*
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6

FOLLICULAR OBSERVATIONS
VOLUME CHANGES :
BORDER APPEARANCE :
CONTENTS :
OTHER :

COMMENTS:

REPORTED BY: REPORT DATE:

10-38 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 46-030370 REV 3


10-14 Cine Memory Operation
(OPTION)

10-14-1 Overview
Cine Memory is an option to the RT 3200 Advantage-I Version 5 software
system. Cine Memory is free running storage of 32 image frames in B-Mode
operation only. Free running means that during B-Mode operation only, the
system displays the current image and has in memory the 32 previous image
frames.

The 32 images represent approximately two seconds of scan time. The


operator essentially has two seconds added to the response time needed
to freeze an image. The obvious advantage being that the operator can
freeze the image and recall a previous image from memory. If the patient
moved or breathed just as the image was frozen, an image prior to
movement can be recalled for taking measurements, recording or printing.

The only functional difference between a system with or without the Cine
Memory option is apparent after an image is frozen and the GAIN control
knob is rotated.

10-14-2 Single Image


Operation
Cine Memory functions in B-Mode only. When FREEZE is activated, the
image is displayed on the monitor as before, with the following exceptions:

• Gain, Dynamic Range and Focal Zone numbers are no longer displayed
after the GAIN control knob is rotated for Cine Memory review.

• The Cine Memory position indicator replaces Gain, Dynamic Range and
Focal Zone after the GAIN control knob is rotated.

Illustration 10-18
Cine Memory Position Indicator
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
11 : 15 : 25
S 3.5MHz
x1.0

GE

46-030370 REV 3 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 10-39


10-14-2 Single Image
Operation
(continued) The arrow on the position indicator will always be on the far right side initially.
This is the most current image.

Turning the GAIN control knob counterclockwise allows for the review of any
of the previously stored 32 image frames. The arrow pointer moves with
every "click" of the GAIN control knob to show the relative position of the
image in Cine Memory.

Rotating the GAIN control knob clockwise reviews images in the opposite
direction. Once a left or right limit is reached, the review wraps around to the
opposite end and continues displaying images from Cine Memory with
GAIN control knob rotation.

After choosing the desired image, the operator can make measurements
and have them entered on a report page. Annotations can also be added
or pictures taken on the thermal printer or multi-image camera.

If the GAIN control knob is rotated, the measurement cursors will be erased.
They are not stored with the image. It is not possible to rotate back and have
the measurement cursors reappear.

Measurements displayed on the left side of the display will remain when the
GAIN control knob is rotated. Press the OFF key to remove this measure-
ment data from the display.

Annotations are also separate from measurement cursors. Annotations will


remain when the GAIN control knob is rotated. Press the ERASE key to
remove annotations.

10-14-3 Multiple Image


Operation
Multiple Image operation functions like single image Cine Memory. Cine
images are available for the last side (right or left) frozen. The Cine position
indicator, measurements and annotations work as previously explained.

Cine Memory is not available for both sides (right and left) simultaneously.
It is only available for the side showing the Cine position indicator. When
switching sides, the Cine Memory function switches to the active side.

10-40 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 46-030370 REV 3


Illustration 10-19
Cine Memory Right Side
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
11 : 15 : 25
CA 5MHz
1.0

G66D54T60
GE

Illustration 10-20
Cine Memory Left Side
GENERAL
ELECTRIC
06 / 20 / 91
11 : 15 : 25
CA 5MHz
1.0

GE

46-030370 REV 3 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 10-41


This page intentionally left blank.

10-42 RT 3200 ADVANTAGE - III FEATURES 46-030370 REV 3


Index

Symbols Body Pattern Controls 3-12. See also Front Panel


Body Marker Package Illustrations 3-13, 5-23
7.0 MHz Transaxial Probe. See Urology Control, J, 1-2-3 5-22
BPD (Biparietal Diameter). See OB TBL 1: BPD
A (Biparietal Diameter)
AB (Calculation of Ratio) 6-37
C
AC (Abdominal Circumference). See OB TBL 1: AC
(Abdominal Circumference) Calc 1 6-22
Accessory Panels A/B (Calculation of Ratio) 6-37
Lower 8-3 Circumference 6-23
Layout 8-4 Heart Rate 6-33
Upper 8-5 Velocity 6-35
Layout 8-5 Volume 6-26
Acoustic Levels A-3 Calc 2 6-39
Measurement Basis B-1 Amniotic Fluid Index 6-54
Notes B-1 Estimated Date of Confinement 6-40
Additional Report Pages Estimated Fetal Body Weight 6-41, 10-9
Report Page Sequencing 10-25 HIP Dysplasia Calculation 10-6
AFI (Amniotic Fluid Index) 6-54 Stepper Volume (STVOL) 7-3
Anatomical Survey Page Calc 3
Comments 10-29 GYN 10-38
Editing the Page 10-29 IVF 10-38
Page Description 10-28 Cine Memory
Report Page Sequencing 10-25 Multiple Image Operation 10-40
User Programmed Features 10-29 Overview 10-39
Area Measurement 4-8 Single Image Operation 10-39
Available Options 1-4 Circumference 6-23
Circumference Measurement 4-6
B Clamp, Mount 7-15
B-Mode Display Selection 3-7. See also Front Cleaning and Inspecting C-1
Panel Clock Readjustment
B-Mode Presetting Date
Control, B 5-4 Control, C, D 5-5
B/M-Mode Display Selection 3-8. See also Front Time
Panel Control, C, T 5-6
Biopsy Guideline Comment Key 3-14. See also Front Panel
ATV Probe Biopsy Guideline 5-27 Control Key Functions 5-1, 6-16
CA/CB Probe Guideline 5-28 Summary 5-3
MAGGI™ guides 5-26, 5-28 Control Parameters
Ultra Pro™ guides 5-26, 5-28 Which Affect Acoustic Sound
Control, L, 1 5-25 B/M-Mode A-1
CTV Probe Guideline 5-27 Focus A-1
D Probe Guideline 5-29 M-Mode A-1
F Probe Guideline 5-29 CRL (Crown Rump Length). See OB TBL 1: CRL
H Probe Guideline 5-30 (Crown Rump Length)
Illustrations 5-27
LP Probe Guideline 5-30
R Probe Guideline 5-31
RA Probe Needle Placement Grid 5-32
Single Keystroke Operation 3-16

46-030370 REV 3 INDEX-1


Index (continued)

D G
Dimensions Generic Measurements 4-1
RT 3200 1-6 Calculation Error Messages 4-10
Display Adjustment. See Monitor: Display Adjustment Gestational Data
Display Formats Editing Gestational Age Data
B/M-Mode Format 1-11 Control, G, 1-2-3-4-5 5-18
Dual B-Mode Format 1-11 Programming Gestational Age Data
Single B-Mode Format 1-10 Control, G, 0 5-16
Display OB Report Page. See Gestational Summary Gestational Report Page
Report Measurement Averaging Page. See Measurement
Display Scale Keys 3-5. See also Front Panel Averaging Page
Distance Measurement 4-4 Gestational Summary Report
Dotted Line On/Off Controlling Cursor Motion 10-11
Control, Q 5-33 Dependent Data Fields 10-20
Dynamic Range 3-4. See also Front Panel Displaying and Exiting 10-11
Displaying the Report Page 10-10
E Edit Fields 10-13
Echo Gain Control 3-4. See also Front Panel Editing the Report Page
Echo Level Measurement Controlling Cursor Motion 10-12
Arbitrary Area Error Markers 10-21
Control, E, 0 5-9 Exiting the Report Page 10-11
Fixed Area Gestational Age Estimation 10-23
Control, E, 1-2-3 5-8 Hardcopy Output 10-22
EDC (Estimated Date of Confinement) 6-40 Independent Data Fields 10-15
EFBW (Estimated Fetal Body Weight) Measurement Averaging 10-24, 10-26
#1 (BPD/AC) 6-41 Overview 10-10
#2 (FL/AC) 6-42 Report Page Sequencing 10-25
#3 (FL/AC/HC) 10-9, 10-19 GYN 10-38
Electrical Requirements 1-5 H
Ellipse Measurements 10-4
Error Messages Hardware Description 1-8
Measurement Calculation 4-10 HC (Head Circumference). See OB TBL 1: HC
(Head Circumference)
F Heart Rate 6-33
Features 1-3 High Frame Rate On/Off
Film Development Time 5-15 Control, K 5-24
Control, F, 1-2-3-4 5-15 HIP (HIP Dysplasia) 10-6
FL (Femur Length). See OB TBL 1: FL (Femur Histogram
Length) Arbitrary Area
Focus Selections 3-5. See also Front Panel Control, E, H, 0 5-13, 5-14
Foot Switch Connection 1-18 Fixed Area
Frame Averaging On/Off Control, E, H, 1-2-3 5-12
Control, W 5-35 Hospital Name
Freeze Key 3-12. See also Front Panel Control, H 5-20
Front Panel 2-3
Function Key Selections 6-1
Function Keys 3-16

INDEX-2 46-030370 REV 3


Index (continued)

I Monitor
Display Adjustment 1-15
ID/Name Key 3-3. See also Front Panel Height Adjustment 1-17
Image Direction Keys 3-5. See also Front Panel Multi-Image Camera Connection 8-14
Image Scroll Keys 3-6. See also Front Panel Multiple Image Display 3-9. See also Front Panel
Inspection Maximum Number of Images 3-10
Monthly C-8
Introduction 1-3 N
Inverse
Control, I, 1-2-3-4 5-21 New Patient Key 3-3. See also Front Panel
IVF 10-38 O
K OB Report. See Gestational Summary Report
Keyboard Illumination 3-14. See also Front Panel OB TBL 1
AC (Abdominal Circumference) 6-10
L AC Factory Stored Table 6-11
AC/HC (Two Diameter Method) 6-14
Lever, Locking 7-15 BPD (Biparietal Diameter) 6-4
BPD Factory Stored Table 6-5
M CRL (Crown Rump Length) 6-6
M-Mode CRL Factory Stored Table 6-7
Sweep Speed 3-9 FL (Femur Length) 6-8
M-Mode Display Selection 3-8. See also Front FL Factory Stored Table 6-9
Panel HC (Head Circumference) 6-12
Maintenance HC Factory Stored Table 6-13
Daily Check List E-1 OB TBL 2 6-15
Monthly Check List E-1 Coding Sheet 6-20, 6-21
Weekly Check List E-1 Editing Gestational Age Data
Map Package. See Mapping Control G, 1-2-3-4-5 6-18. See also Control
Control, N 5-33 Key Functions
Mapping Programming Gestational Age Data
Package A Control G, 0, 1-2-3-4-5 6-16. See also Control
Level 1 6-58 Key Functions
Level 2 6-58 Options
Level 3 6-59 Multi-Image Camera 8-14
Level 4 6-59 Probe Related 1-4
Level N 6-57 Recording Devices 1-4
Package B Sony Page Printer 8-6
Level 1 6-60 VCR 8-10
Level 2 6-61
Level 3 6-61
P
Level 4 6-62 Page Printer. See Sony UP-850/UP-870: Installation
Level N 6-60 Panasonic AG-5200/AG-1260/AG-1270
Measurement Averaging Page Installation 8-10
Average All 10-27 Power-up 1-14
Editing the Page 10-27 Preset Parameters Key 3-7. See also Front Panel
Report Page Sequencing 10-25 Probe
The Report Display 10-26 Cable Arm Support 1-13
Measurement Keys 3-15 Cleaning C-1, C-2
Mechanical Stepper. See Urology Illustrations C-4
Connection 1-12
Storage 1-13

46-030370 REV 3 INDEX-3


Index (continued)

Probe Selection 3-3. See also Front Panel Stepper Volume 6-43, 7-3
Programmable Comments Library Basic Principles of Operation 7-24
Editing the Comments Library 10-32 Calculation Formula 7-23
No Code 10-33 Stepper Volume Formula 7-23
Overview 10-30 Sweep Speed 3-9
Programming Comments 10-31 Symbols. See Warnings and Symbols
Report Page Sequencing 10-25 System
Selecting the Comments Library 10-30 Cleaning
Using the Comments Library 10-33 Console Surfaces C-7
Monitor Face C-7
R Multi Imaging Device C-8
Record Key 3-14 Page Printer C-8
Record Output Video Cassette Recorder C-8
Gamma Curve Selection How to Move the Unit E-2
Control, R, P-V 5-34 How to Store the Unit E-1
Report Page System Dimensions 1-6
Gestational 10-10 System Set-up 1-12. See also Probe: Cable Arm
GYN 10-38 Support
IVF 10-38 T
Urology 10-34
Report Page Sequencing 10-25 Table, Universal 7-15
Temperature/Humidity Requirements 1-5
S Text/Graphics Display On/Off
Safety ix Control, D 5-7
Equipment and Personnel TGC Slide Pots 3-4. See also Front Panel
Calculation Formulas and Databases xiv Troubleshooting
Infection Control xiii RT3200 Advantage - I D-1
Prescription Device xiii Sony Page Printer D-2
Risk of Electrical Shock xiii U
Levels of Concern
Attention x Urology
Caution ix 7.0 MHz Transaxial Probe 7-3
Danger ix Description 7-3
Warning ix Factory Presets 7-4
Patient Infection Control 7-7
Acoustic Hazards xii Parts List 7-3
Diagnostic Information xii Patient Preparation 7-7
Electrical Hazards xii Patient Scan 7-9
Mechanical Hazards xii Probe Preparation 7-4
Patient Identification xii Scanning with Water Path 7-5
Scan Image Adjustment 3-4 System Preparation 7-7
SET 6-46, 7-28 Use with Volume Stepper Device 7-5
Single Keystroke Operation 3-16 Body Patterns 10-37
Sony SVO-1410 Mechanical Stepper 7-3
Installation 8-10 Alternate Assembly 7-17
Sony UP-890 Cleaning and Sterilization 7-22
Installation 8-6 Control/Adjustment Description 7-15
Standard Configuration 1-4 Lithotomy (Stirrup) Table Mounting 7-19
Standard Specifications 1-5 Parts Identification 7-13
Starting the machine. See Power-up Periodic Maintenance 7-21
Replacement Parts 7-22
Typical Use 7-20

INDEX-4 46-030370 REV 3


Index (continued)

Stepper Volume Calculation 7-3


Basic Principles 7-24
Ellipse Method 6-51, 7-33
Formula 7-23
Increment Selection 6-43, 7-25
Scan Preparation 6-44, 7-26
Trace Method 6-49, 7-31
Two Diameter Method 6-46, 7-28
Summary Report
Overview 10-34
Page Edit Fields 10-35
Page Sequencing 10-25

V
VCR. See Panasonic AG-5200/AG-1260/AG-1270:
Installation; Sony SVO-1410 Installation
Velocity 6-35
Volume 6-26

W
Warnings and Symbols ix

46-030370 REV 3 INDEX-5


This page intentionally left blank

INDEX-6 46-030370 REV 3

You might also like